Download: Mirror Download [FCC.gov] Document ID 520639 Application ID UY4Pgll6s5bx48MRrurgNA== Document Description User Manual 3 of 3 Short Term Confidential No Permanent Confidential No Supercede No Document Type User Manual Display Format Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf Filesize 174.35kB (2179433 bits) Date Submitted 2005-03-04 00:00:00 Date Available 2005-03-04 00:00:00 Creation Date 2005-02-03 08:58:28 Producing Software Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows) Document Lastmod 2005-02-22 13:36:18 Document Title 68P09262A58-C Document Author: Win32 user
Chapter 4: Acceptance Test Procedures
Table of Contents
FEB 2005
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Test Equipment Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-4
4-4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All–inclusive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX/RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX ATP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-8
4-9
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX and TX Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-11
4-11
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
4-14
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
4-16
4-16
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
4-18
4-18
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
4-20
4-21
RX FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
4-23
4-23
Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4-25
4-25
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Updating Calibration Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Release Caveats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy and Load Cal File to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
4-26
4-26
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
Introduction
The Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) allow Cellular Field Engineers
(CFEs) to run automated Acceptance Tests on all BTS Subsystem
Devices equipped in the CDF using the LMF and the Test Equipment it
supports.
The CFE can choose to save the results of ATP Tests to a report file from
which ATP Reports are generated for later printing. See the Generating
an ATP Report section in this chapter.
Because Test Equipment Functions during Acceptance Testing are
controlled by the LMF through the GPIB, only the Test Equipment
Models supported by the LMF can be used.
NOTE
– Before using the LMF, read the Release Notes
“Caveats” section in the WinLMF On-Line Help
SR2.16.x for any applicable information.
– The ATP Test is to be performed on out-of-service
sectors only.
– DO NOT substitute Test Equipment with other
models not supported by the LMF.
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed for
calibrating equipment, cables, and other Test Equipment Set
components.
Reduced ATP
NOTE
Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC Compliance.
If license–governing bodies require documentation
supporting BTS Site Compliance with regulations, a full
ATP may be necessary.
Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific
BTS Site are NOT required.
After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE
must perform these procedures (minimum recommendation):
1. Verify that the TX/RX Paths by performing TX Calibration, TX
Audit, and FER Tests.
2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.
Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the
Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the
failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,
refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-1) to
determine the applicable test that must be performed.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
– continued
In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a Forward
Link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the
additional TX Tests for troubleshooting: TX Spectral Mask, TX Rho,
and TX Code Domain.
ATP Test Options
ATP Tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
S All TX: TX Tests verify that the performance of the BTS Transmit
Elements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, Trunking Modules, the
LPA Modules, and passive components including Splitters,
Combiners, Bandpass Filter(s), and RF Cables.
S All RX: The RX Test verifies the performance of the BTS Receive
Elements. These include the MPC, EMPC (for Companion Frames),
BBX, MCC, GLI Cards, and the passive components including RX
Filters and RF Cables.
S All TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX Tests.
S Full Optimization: Executes the TX Calibration, downloads BLO,
and executes the TX Audit before running all TX and RX Tests.
ATP Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP Tests, ensure that the following have
been completed:
S BTS has been optimized (BBX Cards calibrated and BLOs
downloaded) (Chapter 3)
S The carrier(s) and/or sector(s) to be tested have been taken out of
service at the CBSC.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
S CSM Cards, GLI Cards, BBX Cards, MCC Cards and TSU (if the
RFDS is installed) have correct code and Data Loads.
S Primary CSM and GLI are INS_ACTIVE (bright green).
S MCC Cards are INS_ACTIVE (bright green).
S No BBX Cards are keyed (transmitting).
S BBX Cards are OOS_RAM (yellow).
S Test Cables are calibrated.
S Test Equipment has been selected, warmed–up 60 minutes, and
calibrated.
S GPIB is on.
S BTS Transmit Connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be
performed.
4-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
– continued
WARNING
1. All Transmit Connectors must be properly terminated
for all ATP Tests.
2. Before the FER is run, make sure that one of the
following is done:
– All transmitter Connectors are properly terminate
OR
– All LPA Modules are turned OFF (circuit breakers
pulled)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
TX/RX Antenna Connections
Figure 4-1 identifies the Frame Transmit and Receive Antenna
Connections where measurements are to be taken.
Figure 4-1: TX and RX Antenna Connections on I/O Panel
RX DIV RX MAIN on TRF TX on TRF or
Not Used on DRF TX/RX MAIN on DRF
REAR
FRONT
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
ti-CDMA-WP-00214-v01-ildoc-ftw REF
4-3
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up
Required Test Equipment
The following Test Equipment is required:
LMF
Power Meter (used with HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
Communications System Analyzer
Signal Generator for FER Testing (required for all Communications
System Analyzers for 1X FER)
WARNING
– Before installing any Test Equipment directly to any
BTS TX OUT Connector, verify that there are no
CDMA Channels keyed.
– At active sites, have the OMC–R/CBSC place the
carrier assigned to the LPA Modules under test OOS.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
The Test Equipment must be re–calibrated before using it
to perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
Acceptance Test Equipment
Set–up
All ATP Testing
Perform the procedure in Table 4-1 to Set–up Test Equipment for all
tests..
4-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Acceptance Tests – Test Set–up
– continued
Table 4-1: Set–up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests Procedure
n Step
Action
If it has not already been done, interface the LMF Computer to the BTS.
– Refer to Table 3-6 and Figure 3-3.
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF Session and log into the BTS.
– Refer to Table 3-10.
If it has not already been done, connect Test Equipment for Acceptance Testing.
– Refer to Figure 3-20, Figure 3-21, Figure 3-22, Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24, or Figure 3-25, as
applicable, for the Test Equipment and Antenna Duplexing being used.
* IMPORTANT
LMF–based Measurements factor into TX Test Test Cable Insertion Loss between the RF Modem
Frame and Test Equipment.
If additional attenuation, such as external TX Combiners, is inserted in the path, it must be
identified to the LMF by including it in the TX Test Cable Calibration.
– If this is not possible, include the attenuation in the TX Path by editing Test Cable Insertion
Loss Values (refer to Table 3-35).
– Failure to do this will result in test inaccuracies and potential for erroneous ATP failures
because the additional losses would not be compensated for in the test measurements.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-5
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
All–inclusive Tests
General
The all–inclusive Acceptance Tests are performed from the LMF GUI
Environment. These all–inclusive tests are called abbreviated ATPs
because they execute various combinations of individual Acceptance
Tests with a single command. This allows verification of multiple
aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed for
individual Test Set–up and initiation.
Abbreviated ATP Options
There are three abbreviated Acceptance Tests that evaluate different
performance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing to
meet the specific requirements for individual Maintenance and
Performance Verification situations. The following items summarize the
coverage of each Abbreviated Test.:
S All TX/RX: Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selected
MCC Cards and BBX Cards.
S All TX: Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected MCC
Cards and BBX Cards. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of
the following individual tests:
– TX Mask Test
– Rho Test
– Pilot Time Offset Test
– Code Domain Power Test
S All RX: Performs complete Receive ATP on the selected MCC Cards
and BBX Cards. Testing is the equivalent of performing the FER Test.
Abbreviated Acceptance Test Procedures
Procedures to accomplish each type of Abbreviated ATP are included in
the following subsections..
All TX/RX ATP Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-2 to perform the Abbreviated,
All–inclusive Transmit And Receive Test.
Table 4-2: All TX/RX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment initially for Abbreviated Tests as described in Table 4-1.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than
the one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with
the new Multi–Channel Preselector setting.
– Using the wrong MPC Setting can cause a false test failure.
table continued on next page
4-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
– continued
Table 4-2: All TX/RX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select All TX/RX ATP... from the Pull–down Menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
Select the appropriate RX Branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the Pull–down Menu.
* IMPORTANT
The RX Main and Diversity Paths must be tested separately for this configuration because each
requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the proper Test Signal Gain.
NOTE
If a Companion Frame with the Inter–frame Diversity RX Cabling disconnected is being tested do
not select BOTH in this step.
In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Data Rate (1=9600 3=9600 1X) from the Pull–down
Menu.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.
Enter the Channel Elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) Box.
– By default, all Channel Elements are specified.
– The Channel Element Numbers are 0.based; therefore, the first Channel Element is 0.
NOTE
Use one of the following methods to enter more than one Channel Element:
– Enter non–sequential Channel Elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;
0,5,15).
– Enter a range of sequential Channel Elements by typing the first and last Channel Elements
separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-7
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
– continued
Table 4-2: All TX/RX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
In the Test Pattern Box, select the Test Pattern to use for the Acceptance Tests from the
Pull–down Menu.
– Refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay
Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.
10
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
11
Execute the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.
12
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
All TX ATP Test
Perform the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the Abbreviated,
All–inclusive Transmit Test.
Table 4-3: All TX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for Abbreviated Tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select All TX ATP... from the Pull–down Menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
table continued on next page
4-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
– continued
Table 4-3: All TX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Transfer Rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from the
Pull–down Menu.
NOTE
The Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.
In the Test Pattern Box, select the Test Pattern to use for the Acceptance Test from the Pull–down
Menu.
– Refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay
Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
Execute the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.
10
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
All RX ATP Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-4 to perform the Abbreviated,
All–inclusive Receive Test.
Table 4-4: All RX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for Abbreviated Tests per Table 4-1.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than
the one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with
the new Multi–Channel Preselector setting.
– Using the wrong MPC Setting can cause a false test failure.
Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select All RX ATP... from the Pull–down Menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-9
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
– continued
Table 4-4: All RX Acceptance Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
Select the appropriate RX Branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the Pull–down Menu.
In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Data Rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the
Pull–down Menu.
NOTE
The Rate Set Selection of 1 is only available if non–1X Cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.
Enter the Channel Elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) Box.
– By default, all Channel Elements are specified.
– The Channel Element Numbers are 0.based; that is the first Channel Element is 0.
NOTE
Use one of the following methods to enter more than one Channel Element:
– Enter non–sequential Channel Elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;
0,5,15).
– Enter a range of sequential Channel Elements by typing the first and last Channel Elements
separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
10
Follow Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– When the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.
11
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
4-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Individual Acceptance Tests
RX and TX Testing
The following individual ATP Tests can be used to evaluate specific
aspects of BTS Operation against individual performance requirements.
All testing is performed using the LMF GUI Environment.
TX Testing
TX Tests verify any given Transmit Antenna Path and Output Power
Control. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated Test
Equipment. All measurements are made at the appropriate BTS TX
OUT Connector(s).
TX Tests verify TX Operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link using
selected BBX Cards assigned to respective Sector Antennas. Each BBX
is keyed–up to generate a CDMA Carrier (using both bbxlevel and
BLO) at the CDF File–specified Carrier Output Power Level.
RX Testing
RX Testing verifies Receive Antenna Paths for BBX Cards selected for
the test. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated Test
Equipment to inject a CDMA RF Carrier with all zero Longcode at the
specified RX Frequency at the appropriate BTS RX IN Connector(s).
RX Tests verify RX Operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link using
all equipped MCC Cards assigned to all respective sector/antennas.
Individual Tests
Spectral Purity TX Mask
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA Carrier Waveform
generated on each sector meets the transmit Spectral Mask Specification
(as defined in IS–97) with respect to the assigned CDF File Values.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot Channel Element Digital
Waveform Quality (Rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.
Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMA
Modulation Spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the Communications
System Test Set Measurement Interval (based on the BTS System Time
Reference) and the incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS
(Pilot only, Walsh Code 0).
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
This test verifies the Code Domain Power Levels, that have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh Channels, using the OCNS Command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the Noise Floor of all EVEN–numbered “OFF”
Walsh Channels measures < –27 dB for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X
with respect to total CDMA Channel Power.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-11
Individual Acceptance Tests
– continued
BTS FER
This test verifies the BTS Receive FER on all Traffic Channel Elements
currently configured on all equipped MCC Cards (full rate at one percent
FER) at an RF Input Level of –119 dBm on the Main RX Antenna Paths
using operator–selected, CDF–equipped MCC Cards and BBX Cards at
the site. Diversity RX Antenna Paths are also tested using the lowest
equipped MCC Channel Element ONLY.
NOTE
There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER
Readings taken at levels below –119 dBm, other than to
verify that the FER Measurement reflects changes in the
RX Iinput Signal Level.
4-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
Background
Overview
This test verifies the Spectral Purity of each operator–selected BBX
Carrier keyed–up at a specific frequency specified in the current CDF.
All tests are performed using the external, calibrated Test Equipment
controlled by the same command. All measurements are made at the
appropriate BTS TX Antenna Connector..
Test Patterns
There are four operator–selectable Test Patterns with which this
Acceptance Test can be performed. The patterns, along with the channels
tested and Gain Setting for each, are listed in Table 3-40. Refer to “TX
Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level Offset Calibration section of
Chapter 3 for more information on the Test Patterns..
Equipment Operation During Testing
At least one MCC must be selected to perform the Standard, CDF Pilot,
and CDF Test Patterns. For these Test Patterns, Forward Links are
enabled for Synch Channel (SCH), Paging Channel (PCH), and Traffic
Channel (TCH) Elements from the selected MCC(s), as shown in
Table 3-40.
Gain is set for the applicable channels on each antenna as shown in the
table. The operator–selected BBX Cards will be keyed using a
BLO–corrected bbxlvl Value to generate a CDMA Carrier. RF Output
Power, as measured at the appropriate Frame TX Antenna Connector,
will be set to one of the following depending on the Operating
Frequency Spectrum.:
S 800 MHz: 33.5 dBm
S 1.9 GHz: 31.0 dBm
Test Measurements
The Test Equipment will measure and return the attenuation level in dB
of all spurious and IM products with respect to the Mean Power of the
CDMA Channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, verifying that
results meet system tolerances at the following test points. Refer to also
Figure 4-2):
S For 800 MHz:
– At least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from Center Frequency
– At least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from Center Frequency
– At least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from Center Frequency
– At least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from Center Frequency
S For 1.9 GHz:
– At least –45 dB @ + 885 kHz from Center Frequency
– At least –45 dB @ – 885 kHz from Center Frequency
– At least –55 dB @ – 1980 kHz from Center Frequency
– At least –55 dB @ + 1980 kHz from Center Frequency
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-13
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
– continued
Redundant BBX Testing
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will be
assigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then be
repeated..
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Acceptance Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-5 to verify that the Transmit Spectral
Mask Specification on the TX Antenna Paths for the selected BBX
Cards.
Table 4-5: Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX Cards to be tested.
If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF; select at least one MCC.
– Refer to the “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” in the “BayLevel Offset Calibration” section
of Chapter 3.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > TX Mask... from the Pull–down Menus.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate Transfer Rate (1 = 9600, 3 =
9600 1X) from the Pull–down Menu in the Rate Set Box.
NOTE
The Rate Set Selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.
In the Test Pattern Box, select the Test Pattern to use for the Calibration from the Pull–down
Menu.
– Refer to the “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the
Bay Level Offset Calibration section of Chapter 3.
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
table continued on next page
4-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
– continued
Table 4-5: Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Test Procedure
n Step
Action
10
Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.
11
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
Figure 4-2: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the Mean
Power of the CDMA Channel
– 1980 kHz
+ 1980 kHz
– 885 kHz
– 750 kHz
FEB 2005
+ 885 kHz
+750 kHz
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-15
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test
Background
Overview
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot Channel Element Digital
Waveform Quality of each operator–selected BBX Carrier keyed–up at a
specific frequency specified in the current CDF. All tests are performed
using the external, calibrated Test Equipment controlled by the same
command. All measurements are made at the appropriate TX Antenna
Connector..
Equipment Operation During Testing
Pilot Gain will be set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH Elements
from the MCC Cards will be forward–link disabled. The selected BBX
Cards will be keyed–up using both bbxlvl and BLO to generate a
CDMA Carrier (with Pilot Channel Element only, Walsh Code 0). RF
Output Power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate BTS TX
Antenna Connector..
Test Measurements
The Test Equipment will measure and return the Pilot Channel Element
Digital Waveform Quality (Rho) Percentage, verifying that the result
meets the following specification.:
Waveform Quality (Rho) should be > 0.912.
Redundant BBX Testing.
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will be
assigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then be
repeated for the Redundant BBX..
Waveform Quality (Rho)
Acceptance Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-6 to verify that the Pilot Channel
Element Waveform Quality (Rho) on the TX Antenna Paths for the
selected BBX Cards.
Table 4-6: Waveform Quality (Rho) Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX Cards to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > Rho... from the Pull–down Menus.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
table continued on next page
4-16
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test
– continued
Table 4-6: Waveform Quality (Rho) Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-17
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Background
Overview
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot Channel Element Pilot Time
Offset of each operator–selected BBX Carrier keyed–up at a specific
frequency specified in the current CDF. All tests will be performed using
the external, calibrated Test Equipment controlled by the same
command. All measurements will be made at the BTS TX Antenna
Connector..
Equipment Operation During Testing
The Pilot Gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH
Elements from the MCC Cards will be forward–link disabled. The
selected BBX Cards will be keyed using both bbxlvl and BLO to
generate a CDMA Carrier (with Pilot Channel Element only, Walsh
Code 0). TX Power Output is set at 40 dBm as measured at the TX
Output..
Test Measurements
The Test Equipment will measure and return the Pilot Time Offset in ms,
verifying that results meet the following specification.:
Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset
(zeroms).
.Redundant BBX Testing –
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will be
assigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then be
repeated for the Redundant BBX..
NOTE
This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency and
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) ATP Tests, however, only
Pilot Time Offset results are written to the ATP Test
Report.
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance
Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-7 to verify that the Pilot Time Offset
on the TX Antenna Paths for the selected BBX Cards.
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX Cards to be tested.
table continued on next page
4-18
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
– continued
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
n Step
Action
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > Pilot Time Offset... from the Pull–down
Menus.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-19
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Background
Overview
This test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of each
operator–selected BBX Carrier keyed at a specific frequency specified in
the current CDF. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated
Test Equipment controlled by the same command. All measurements are
made at the appropriate BTS TX Antenna Connector..
CDMA Channel Test Set–up
Pilot Gain should be set to 262 for each antenna and the selected MCC
Cards should be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh Code
Traffic Channel Elements by enabling Orthogonal Channel Noise Source
(OCNS) on all odd MCC Channel Elements (maximum 32 Full Rate
Channels with an OCNS Gain of 81).
– All even–numbered Walsh Code Traffic Channel Elements should
have OCNS disabled, and are considered “OFF”.
– Selected MCC Cards should be Forward–Link Enabled for the
antenna (sector) under test..
Equipment Operation During Testing
The BBX should be keyed–up using a BLO–corrected bbxlvl Value to
generate a CDMA Carrier consisting of Pilot and OCNS Channels. RF
Output Power, as measured at the appropriate Frame TX Antenna
Connector, is set at one of the following values depending on the
Operating Frequency Spectrum.:
– 800 MHz: 33.5 dBm
– 1.9 GHz: 31.0 dBm
Test Measurements
The Test Equipment will measure and return the Channel Element
Power in dB of all specified Walsh Channels within the CDMA
spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify that the
following parameters are met.
– Refer to Figure 4-3 for graphic representations.:
S Traffic Channel Element Power Level will be verified by calculating
the ratio of Pilot Power to OCNS Gain of all Traffic Channels [Root
Sum of the Square (RSS) of each OCNS Gain divided by the Pilot
Power].
– This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.
S Noise Floor (unassigned “OFF” even–numbered Walsh Channels) is
verified to be < –27 dB for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X with
respect to total CDMA Channel Power.
4-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
– continued
NOTE
When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is
an MCC8E or MCC24E, the Redundant BBX may fail or
show marginal performance. This is due to a Timing
Mismatch that the LMF does not address. Performing this
test from the CBSC will not have this timing problem.
Redundant BBX Testing
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the Redundant BBX will be
assigned to the current TX Antenna Path under test. The test will then be
repeated for the Redundant BBX. Upon completion of the test, OCNS
Channels will be disabled on the specified MCC Channel Elements..
Code Domain Power/Noise
Floor Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-8 to verify the Code Domain
Power/Noise Floor of each selected BBX Carrier keyed–up at a specific
frequency.
Table 4-8: Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for TX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.
Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select TX > Code Domain Power... from the
Pull–down Menus.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate Transfer Rate (1 = 9600, 3 =
9600 1X) from the Pull–down Menu in the Rate Set Box.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-21
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
– continued
Table 4-8: Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
Follow the Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in a Status Report Window.
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
Figure 4-3: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB FOR IS–95A/B AND
CDMA2000 1X
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
63
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) Example
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB FOR IS–95A/B AND
CDMA2000 1X
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
63
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example
4-22
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
RX FER Acceptance Test
Background
Overview
This test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all TCHs
currently configured on operator–selected MCC Cards (full rate at 1%
FER) at –119 dBm. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated
Test Equipment as the Signal Source controlled by the same command.
Measurements are made at the specified BTS RX Antenna Connection..
Equipment Operation During Testing
The Pilot Gain on each MCC will be set to 262 for each TX Antenna,
and the Forward Link for all TCH Elements from the MCC Cards will
be enabled. Appropriate BBX(s) must be keyed in order to enable the
RX Receive Circuitry. Operator–selected BBX Cards will be keyed
using only bbxlvl, to generate a CDMA Carrier with Pilot Channel
Element only.
Transmit Power Output is set at –40 dBm. Test Equipment Output Power
is set so that the received power at the BBX is –119 dBm. The Final
Output Power Setting of the Test Equipment takes into account the MPC
type, BTS RF Path Losses, and test Test Cable Insertion Losses. If
selected, the Redundant BBX will be assigned to the current RX
Antenna Paths under test..
Test Measurements
The LMF will prompt the MCC Channel Element under test to measure
all–zero Longcode and provide the FER report on the selected active
MCC on the Reverse Link for the Main and, if selected, Diversity RX
Antenna Paths. Results are evaluated to ensure they meet the following
specification.:
FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500
Redundant BBX Testing
After the test, the BBX and the Test Equipment will be de–keyed to shut
down the Pilot Signal and the active Channel Element, respectively. If
the Redundant BBX was tested, BBXR assignment to an active sector
will also be reset..
FER Acceptance Test
Perform the procedure in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on RX Antenna
Paths using selected MCC Cards and BBX Cards.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-23
RX FER Acceptance Test
– continued
Table 4-9: FER Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Set–up the Test Equipment for RX Acceptance Tests per Table 4-1.
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than
the one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with
the new Multi–Channel Preselector Setting.
* IMPORTANT
Using the wrong MPC Setting can cause a false test failure.
Select the BBX Cards and MCC Cards to be tested.
Click on Tests in the BTS Menu Bar, and select RX > FER... from the Pull–down Menu.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier Pick List.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key while clicking on Pick List Items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct Channel Number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier #
Channels Box.
– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.CDF Files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct Channel Number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
Box.
Select the appropriate RX Branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the Pull–down Menu.
In the Rate Set Box, select the appropriate Data Rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the
Pull–down Menu.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non–1X Cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X Cards are selected for the test.
Click OK to display a Status Bar followed by a Directions Pop–up Window.
10
Follow Cable Connection Directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue Button to
begin testing.
– As the ATP Process is completed, results will be displayed in the Status Report Window.
11
Click either the Save Results Button or the Dismiss Button.
* IMPORTANT
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the Test Report File.
4-24
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Generating an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP Test is run, ATP Data is updated and must be saved to
an ATP Report File using the Save Results Button to close the Status
Report Window. The ATP Report File will not be updated if the Status
Report Window is closed using the Dismiss Button.
ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for
each test:
S Test Name
S PASS or FAIL
S Description Information (if applicable)
S BBX Number
S Channel Number
S Carrier Number
S Sector Number
S Upper Test Limit
S Lower Test Limit
S Test Result
S Time Stamp
S Details/Warning Information (if applicable)
Perform the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printable
file for the ATP Report.
Table 4-10: ATP Report Generation Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on the Login Tab (if not in the forefront).
Click on the desired BTS in the Available Base Stations Pick List to select it.
Click on the Report Button.
If a printable file is not needed, click on the Dismiss Button.
If a printable file is required, perform the following actions.
5a
Select the desired file type (text, comma–delimited, HTML) for the report file from the Pull–down
Menu at the bottom of the screen.
5b
Click the Save Button to save the file.
– The file will be saved in the selected format in the bts–# folder for the BTS selected.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-25
Updating Calibration Data Files
Software Release Caveats
Software Release R2.16.5.x allows the user to load the Calibration File
from the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then FTP the
new Calibration File to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for the
user to place the Calibration File at the OMC–R.
Copy and Load Cal File to the
CBSC
After completing the TX Calibration and audit, updated CAL File
information must be moved from the LMF Windows environment back
to the CBSC, a UNIX environment. The following procedures detail
moving files from one environment to the other.
Copying CAL Files from LMF to a Diskette
Perform the procedures in Table 4-11 to copy the CAL Files from an
LMF Computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 4-11: Copy CAL Files to a Diskette Procedure
n Step
Action
With Windows running on the LMF Computer, insert a disk into Drive A:\.
Launch the Windows Explorer Application Program from the Start > Programs Menu List.
Select the applicable :\).
With Solaris versions of UNIX, create a UNIX–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in the Home
Directory by performing the following actions.
9a
Type the following command:
dos2unix /floppy/no_name/ bts–#.cal bts–#.cal
Where: # = BTS Number for which the CAL File was created
9b
Press the Enter Key.
NOTE
Other versions of UNIX do not support the dos2unix Command. In these cases, use the UNIX
cp (Copy) Command.
– The copied files contain DOS Line Feed Characters that must be edited out with a UNIX Text
Editor.
10
Enter ls –l *.cal and press the Enter Key. Verify that the CAL Files have been copied.
– Verify that all CAL Files to be transferred appear in the displayed listing.
11
Type EJECT, and press the Enter Key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
4-27
Updating Calibration Data Files
– continued
Notes
4-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Chapter 5: Prepare to Leave the Site
Table of Contents
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Modules into Service with the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Final Checks Before Leaving Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment
Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the Test Equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal Procedure
n Step
Action
n WARNING
Make sure that no BBX Cards are keyed before performing this procedure.
– Failure to do so can result in personal injury and damage to BTS LPA Modules.
At the rear of the frame, disconnect all external Test Equipment from all TX and RX Connectors.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX Antenna Feed Lines at the Frame RF Interface
Panel.
* IMPORTANT
Verify that all Sector Antenna Feed Lines are connected to the correct Antenna Connectors on the
frame. Crossed Antenna Cables will degrade Call Processing.
Bringing Modules into Service
with the LMF
NOTE
Whenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the site
and enable all devices on the BTS.
If a Reason Code is present and/or data should/could not be loaded
remotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-2 as
required to bring BTS Processor Modules from an OOS State to an INS
State.
Table 5-2: Bring Modules into Service Procedure
n Step
Action
In the LMF GUI Environment, select the device(s) to be enabled by clicking on each one.
* IMPORTANT
S The MGLI and CSM must be INS_ACTIVE (bright green) before an MCC can be enabled.
Enable the Processor Cards in the following order.
1. MGLI
2. CSM Cards
3. MCC Cards
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-2: Bring Modules into Service Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on Device in the BTS Menu Bar, and select Enable from the Pull–down Menu.
– A Status Report Window is displayed.
* IMPORTANT
If a BBX is selected, a Transceiver Parameters Window is displayed to collect Keying
Information. Do not enable the BBX.
Click Cancel to close the Transceiver Parameters Window, if applicable.
Click OK to close the Status Report Window.
– Bright Green is the color of devices that successfully change to INS.
LMF Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 as required to terminate the LMF
GUI Session and remove the LMF Computer.
Table 5-3: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF Procedure
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not power down the LMF Computer without performing the procedure below; corrupted
and/or lost Data Files may result.
5-4
Log out of all BTS Sessions and exit the LMF by clicking on File in the LMF Window Menu Bar
and selecting Logout and Exit from the Pull–down Menu.
In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows Message appears.
Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.
Disconnect the LMF Computer Ethernet Port from the BTS Frame.
Disconnect the LMF Computer Serial Port, the RS–232–to–GPIB Interface Box, and the GPIB
Cables as required for equipment transport.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 or E1 Span Connectors removed
previously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-4 and
Figure 3-2.
Table 5-4: T1 or E1 Spans Re–connection Procedure
n Step
Action
Re–connect any disconnected Span Connectors to the Span I/O A and B Boards.
If equipped, ensure that the CSU is powered ON.
Verify Span Status, ensuring that the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS.
Final Checks Before Leaving
Site
Make sure all requirements listed in Table 5-5 are completed before
leaving the site.
Table 5-5: Check Before Leaving the Site Procedure
n Step
Action
For AC Frame only:
Validate the Vtrim Signal Cabling.
Ensure that the Battery Voltage is 27 Volts at 25C.
– If external batteries are provided by the Customer, ensure that the Customer Circuit Breaker is
closed.
NOTE
A Low Voltage Disconnect must be in series with the external batteries.
FEB 2005
Verify that no Alarm Conditions are being reported to the CBSC after all Cabinet Doors are
closed.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Reset All Devices and Initialize
Site Remotely
Devices in the BTS should not be left with Data and Code Loaded from
the LMF. The Configuration Data and Code Loads used for normal
operation could be different from those stored in the LMF Files.
The following two procedure, one for Circuit Backhaul and the other for
Packet Backhaul, are provided to remotely reset the BTS Devices and
then initialize the BTS.
Circuit Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization
Perform the procedure in Table 5-6 to remotely reset the BTS Devices in
a Circuit Backhaul BTS, and then remotely initialize the same BTS.
Table 5-6: Circuit Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization Procedure
n Step
Action
Terminate the LMF Session by performing the procedure in Table 5-3.
Reconnect the Spans by performing the procedure in Table 5-4.
From the BTS Site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS Reset.
OR
At the BTS Site, perform the actions in Step 4 through Step 6.
Unseat one GLI Card and wait for 30 seconds.
Re–seat the GLI and wait for it to complete its Initialization Process (this takes about one minute).
Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for the second GLI.
Depending on the number and configuration of installed operational GLI Cards, perform the
following actions.
S BTS with Redundant GLI Cards, proceed to Step 8.
S BTS with a non–Redundant GLI or a non–operational Redundant GLI, proceed to Step 9.
From the OMC–R, run the ACTIVATE Command on the BTS.
– After the ACTIVATE Command has been executed, proceed to Step 10.
From the OMC–R, perform the following actions.
9a
ACTIVATE the GLI.
– This action sets the NextLoad Attribute for the GLI to work with the current BSS Software
Version.
9b
Disable the GLI.
9c
Enable the GLI.
– This action allows the MM to load the software version specified by the NextLoad Attribute.
9d
Once the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R to again run the ACTIVATE Command on the
BTS.
table continued on next page
5-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-6: Circuit Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization Procedure
n Step
Action
10
Once the GLI Cards are loaded with the specified Code Version, the active GLI will verify and
update, as required, its RAM.
– Also, if necessary, ROM Code Loads for the installed CSM, MCC, and BBX Cards using the
DLM.
11
After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R to confirm that the BTS is
under OMC–R control.
Packet Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization
Perform the procedure in Table 5-7 to remotely reset the BTS Devices in
a Packet Backhaul BTS, and then remotely initialize the same BTS.
Table 5-7: Packet Backhaul Remote Reset and Initialization Procedure
n Step
Action
Terminate the LMF Session by performing the procedure in Table 5-3.
Reconnect the Spans by performing the procedure in Table 5-4.
Determine which of the two types of PREACTIVATE Load Processes is applicable to your
situation.
Rolling Upgrade: This Load Process is only available when the BTS Cards are populated for Full
Redundancy as applicable.
Quick Reboot: This Load Process is used when Redundancy for the BTS Cards is not available.
– The GLI3 disables and reboots to the new Load. This will cause all the other cards to go out
of service.
– Once it is rebooted, the GLI3 determines which cards require a new Load and then downloads
the cards in the order that they establish communication with the GLI3 following their reboot.
– The GLI3 can reload up to 16 devices simultaneously.
From the BTS Site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to PREACTIVATE the BTS to
the required software version for the BSS.
After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R to confirm that the BTS is
under OMC–R control.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
5-7
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Notes
5-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Chapter 6: Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
FEB 2005
Basic Troubleshooting: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Force LAN A Active
(LMF Connection at I/O Panel LAN Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Force LAN A Active
(LMF Connection at Service Shelf LAN Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the GLI IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Communications System Analyzer . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate with Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-4
6-5
6-7
6-7
6-8
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-11
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-12
6-13
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Every Test Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify BLO Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single–Sided BLO Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Faults Are Isolated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-17
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Passed Reduced ATP Tests but Has Forward Link Problem in
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement .
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-19
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-3
Table of Contents
– continued
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-22
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-27
6-28
Troubleshooting: RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Tests Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX Paths Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Tests Fail on a Single Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
6-29
6-29
6-29
6-30
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module LED Status (except GLI3, CSM, BBX, MCC) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Module LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI3 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI3 Pushbutton and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLPA LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
6-31
6-31
6-31
6-32
6-34
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-40
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
6-42
6-44
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Basic Troubleshooting: Overview
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) Team Members
while performing BTS Optimization and Acceptance Testing. This
Troubleshooting Guide was created as an interim reference document for
use in the field. It provides “what to do if” basic troubleshooting
suggestions when the BTS Equipment does not perform according to the
procedures documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs and
information gained from experience in Motorola Labs and Classrooms.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
n Step
Action
If the LED on either GLI is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure.
Reset the GLI by re-seating it.
– If re–seating the MGLI does not fix the problem, proceed to Step 2.
Install a GLI Card in the Redundant GLI Slot and retry.
NOTE
A Red LED may also indicate no termination on an External LAN Connector (I/O Panel at the top
of the frame or at the top of a Logical BTS Frame).
Circuit BTS:
Verify that the Span Line is disconnected at the Span I/O Card.
Circuit or Packet BTS:
Verify that the OMC–R has disabled the BTS.
“Ping” the INS_ACTIVE GLI.
– Refer to Table 3-15.
Verify that the LMF is connected to the Primary LAN (LAN A) at one of the following locations.
– The Service Shelf below the SCCP Cage.
– The BTS I/O Panel at the top of the frame.
If LAN A is not the active LAN, force a LAN Switch to LAN A by performing the procedure in
Table 6-2.
Verify that the LMF was configured properly.
If a Xircom Parallel BNC LAN Interface is being used, verify that the BTS-LMF Cable is RG-58
(flexible black cable, less than 2.5 feet in length).
Verify that the External LAN Connectors are properly terminated at either of the following two
locations.
– Service Shelf
– BTS I/O Panel at the top of the frame.
10
If the LMF is connected to the Primary LAN at the Service Shelf, verify that a T-Adapter is not
used on the LMF Computer or on the Ethernet Hub/Adapter Connector.
11
If the LMF is connected to the Primary LAN at the Service Shelf, try connecting to the Ethernet
Out Port on the I/O Panel (top of frame) using the procedure in Table 3-7.
12
Re-boot the LMF and retry.
13
Re-seat the INS_ACTIVE GLI and retry.
table continued on next page
6-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
n Step
Action
14
Re-seat the INS_ACT GLI and retry.
15
Verify that the GLI IP Addresses are configured properly by performing the procedure in
Table 6-4.
Force LAN A Active (LMF
Connection at I/O Panel LAN
Connector)
Table 6-2: Procedure to Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN
(LMF Connection at I/O Panel LAN Connector)
n Step
Action
If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all External LAN Connectors are either terminated
with 50Ω Loads or cabled to another frame.
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF Computer to the Stand–alone or Starter Frame,
as applicable (Table 3-6).
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF Session and log into the BTS on the active LAN
(Table 3-10).
Remove the 50Ω Terminator from the LAN B IN Connector on the I/O Panel of the Stand–alone
or Starter Frame.
– The LMF Session will become inactive.
Log into the BTS with the LMF (Table 3-10).
– Forcing LAN A to the INS_ACTIVE State was successful if the LMF can log into the BTS
and status any card in the cage.
S If LAN A was successfully forced to an active state, skip to Step 12.
With the 50Ω Terminator still removed from the LAN B IN Connector, remove the 50Ω
Terminator from LAN B OUT Connector.
– If more than one frame is connected to the LAN, remove the Terminator from the last frame in
the chain.
Again attempt to log the LMF into the BTS Frame on LAN A.
If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state, proceed to Step 12.
– Forcing the LAN to the INS_ACTIVE State was successful if the LMF can log into the BTS
and status any card in the cage.
With the 50Ω Terminators still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI Gard in each frame
connected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the SCCP Backplanes.
10
Reseat each GLI Card until all are reconnected.
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-3
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Table 6-2: Procedure to Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN
(LMF Connection at I/O Panel LAN Connector)
n Step
11
Action
Allow the GLI Cards to power up, then attempt to select and status cards in the SCCP Cages.
S If LAN A is active, proceed toStep 12.
S If LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting following the procedures
in Table 6-1.
12
Replace the 50Ω Terminators removed from the LAN B IN and OUT connectors.
NOTE
To ensure the INS_ACT GLI Card does not swap LANs after LMF login, the 50Ω Terminator may
be left off of the LAN B OUT connector until LMF operations are completed.
Force LAN A Active (LMF
Connection at Service Shelf
LAN Connector)
Table 6-3: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN,
LMF Connection at Service Shelf LAN Connector
n Step
Action
If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all external LAN Connectors are either terminated
with 50Ω Loads or cabled to another frame.
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF Computer to LAN B on the Stand–alone or
Starter Frame, as applicable (Table 3-6).
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF Session and log into the BTS (Table 3-10).
Remove the 50Ω Terminator from the LAN B IN Connector on the I/O Panel at the top of the
Stand–alone or Starter Frame.
– The LMF session will become inactive.
Log the LMF out of the BTS.
Disconnect the LMF Computer from the Service Shelf LAN B Connector and connect it to the
LAN A Connector.
Determine if LAN A is active and capable of accepting an LMF log–in by using the LMF Ping
Utility to query the INS_ACT GLI (Table 3-15).
If the INS_ACT GLI responds to the ping, log into the BTS on LAN A.
Attempt to select and status a card in the BTS.
– Forcing LAN A to active state was successful if the LMF can log in, select, and status any
card in the cage.
S If LAN A was successfully forced to an active state, skip to Step 16.
. . . continued on next page
6-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Table 6-3: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN,
LMF Connection at Service Shelf LAN Connector
n Step
Action
10
With the 50Ω Terminator still removed from the LAN B IN Connector, remove the 50Ω
Terminator from LAN B OUT connector.
– If more than one frame is connected to the LAN, remove the Terminator from the last frame in
the chain.
11
If LAN A was successfully forced to an active state, skip to Step 16.
– Forcing LAN A to active state was successful if the LMF can log in, select, and status any
card in the cage.
12
With the 50Ω Terminators still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI Card in each frame
connected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the SCCP Backplanes.
13
Reseat each GLI Card until all are reconnected.
14
Allow the GLI Cards to power up, then attempt to select and status cards in the SCCP Cages.
S If LAN A is active, proceed to Step 16.
15
If LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting following the procedures in
Table 6-1.
16
Replace the 50Ω Terminators removed from the LAN B IN and OUT Connectors.
NOTE
To ensure the INS_ACT GLI Card does not swap LANs after LMF Login, the 50Ω Terminator
may be left off of the LAN B OUT Connector until LMF Operations are completed.
Set the GLI IP Address
Table 6-4: Procedure to set GLI IP Address
n Step
Action
If it has not previously been done, establish an MMI Communication Session with the GLI Card
as described in Table 3-14.
Enter the following Command to display the IP Address and Subnet Mask Settings for the card:
config lg0 current
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI3>config lg0 current
lg0: IP Address is set to
DEFAULT (configured based on Card location)
lg0: netmask is set to
DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-5
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Table 6-4: Procedure to set GLI IP Address
n Step
Action
If the IP Address setting response shows an IP Address rather than “Default (configured
based on Card location),” enter the following:
config lg0 ip default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI3>config lg0 ip default
_param_config_lg0_ip(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
lg0: ip address set to DEFAULT
If the GLI Subnet Mask Setting does not display as “DEFAULT (255.255.255.128),” set it to
default by entering the following command:
config lg0 netmask default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI3>config lg0 netmask default
_param_config_lg0_netmask(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
lg0: netmask set to DEFAULT
Set the GLI Route Default to default by entering the following command:
config route default default
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI3>config route default default
_esh_config_route_default(): param_delete(): 0x00050001
route: default gateway set to DEFAULT
When changes are completed, close the MMI Session, and reset the GLI Card.
NOTE
Changes to the settings will not take effect unless the GLI is reset.
Once the GLI is reset, re–establish MMI Communication with it and issue the following command
to confirm its IP Address and Subnet Mask Settings:
config lg0 current
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
GLI3>config lg0 current
lg0: IP Address is set to
DEFAULT (configured based on Card location)
lg0: netmask is set to
DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)
6-6
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for all remaining GLI Cards, including those in any additional
inter–connected frames.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Cannot Communicate with
Power Meter
Table 6-5: Power Meter Communication Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB Adapter.
Verify Cable Connections as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify that the GPIB Address of the Power Meter is set to the same value displayed in the
applicable GPIB Address Box of the LMF Options Window Test Equipment Tab.
– Refer to Table 3-29 or Table 3-30 and the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for
details.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter DIP Backplane Configuration Switch Settings are correct.
– Refer to Test Equipment Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.
– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB Box Power and retry.
Verify that the LMF Computer COM1 Port is not used by another application.
– For example, if a HyperTerminal Window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all Test Equipment by clicking Util in the BTS Menu Bar and selecting Test Equipment >
Reset from the Pull–down Menus.
Cannot Communicate with
Communications System
Analyzer
Table 6-6: Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB Adapter.
Verify that the Cable Connections are as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify that the Analyzer GPIB Address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIB
Address Box of the LMF Options Window Test Equipment Tab.
– Refer to Table 3-29 or Table 3-30 and the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for
details.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter DIP Backplane Configuration Switch Settings are correct.
– Refer to Test Equipment Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.
– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB Box Power and retry.
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-7
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Table 6-6: Communications System Analyzer Communication Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the LMF Computer COM1 Port is not used by another application.
– For example, if a HyperTerminal Window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all Test Equipment by clicking Util in the BTS Menu Bar and selecting Test Equipment >
Reset from the Pull–down Menus.
Cannot Communicate with
Signal Generator
Table 6-7: Signal Generator Communication Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the Signal Generator is connected to the LMF containing a GPIB Adapter.
Verify that the Cable Connections are as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify that the Signal Generator GPIB Address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable
GPIB Address Box of the LMF Options Window Test Equipment Tab.
– Refer to Table 3-29 or Table 3-30 and the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for
details.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter DIP Backplane Configuration Switch Settings are correct.
– Refer to Test Equipment Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.
– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB Box Power and retry.
Verify that the LMF Computer COM1 Port is not used by another application.
– For example, if a HyperTerminal Window is open for MMI, close it.
6-8
Reset all Test Equipment by clicking Util in the BTS Menu Bar and selecting Test Equipment >
Reset from the Pull–down Menus.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Download
Troubleshooting: Download
Table 6-8: Code Download Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the T1 or E1 Span is disconnected from the BTS at Site I/O Boards.
– Refer to Figure 3-2.
Verify that the LMF can communicate with the BTS Devices using the LMF Status Function.
Establish communications with the MGLI before trying to communicate with any other BTS
Device.
– The MGLI must be INS_ACTIVE (bright green).
Verify that the target card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
S If the target card LED is solid red, it implies a hardware failure.
S If the target card LED is bright green, proceed to Step 9.
Reset the target card by re-seating it.
S If the LED Alarm is still being reported, proceed to Step 6.
S If the LED Alarm is no longer being reported, proceed to Step 9.
Replace with the same type of card from another slot and retry.
Re-seat the card and try again.
S If the Download Portion completes and the Reset Portion fails, proceed to Step 8.
S If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after Code Download, proceed to Step 9.
S If a BBX reports a Failure Message and is OOS_RAM, the Code Load was OK.
– Use the LMF Status Function to verify the Load.
Reset the device by selecting the device and selecting Reset.
Use the LMF Device > Status Function to verify that the Code Load was accepted.
S If the Code Load was accepted, proceed to Step 10.
S If the Code Load was not accepted, proceed to Table 6-9 to troubleshoot the Data Download
Failure.
10
FEB 2005
Use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM Code into Flash Memory.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-9
Troubleshooting: Download
– continued
Cannot Download DATA to Any
Device (Card)
Table 6-9: Data Download Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat the Code and Data Load Procedure.
Verify that the ROM and RAM Code Loads are of the same release by statusing the card.
– Refer to Download the BTS section of Chapter 3 for more information.
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM State (yellow in LMF Display) with data downloaded to the
device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green once it is
enabled.
The four Device States that can be displayed by the LMF are:
ENABLED (bright green, INS_ACT)
STANDBY (olive green, INS_STANDBY – Mate CSM and GLI only)
DISABLED (yellow, OOS_RAM)
RESET (blue, OOS_ROM)
Table 6-10: Device Enable (INS) Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat the Code and Data Load Procedure.
If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify that the CDF has correct latitude and longitude data for the
Cell Site location and GPS Sync.
Verify that the Primary CSM is in the INS_ACTIVE (bright green) State.
NOTE
MCC Cards will not enable without the CSM being INS.
Verify that the 19.6608 MHz CSM Clock is present; MCC Cards will not enable without it.
S If MCC Cards give “invalid or no System Time,” proceed to Step 5.
NOTE
BBX Cards should not be enabled for ATP Tests.
Verify that the CSM is enabled.
When all else fails, perform the following actions.
6a
Log out of the BTS.
6b
Exit the LMF.
table continued on next page
6-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Download
– continued
Table 6-10: Device Enable (INS) Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
6c
Restart the application.
6d
Log into the BTS.
6e
Re–attempt Device Enable Actions.
LPA Errors
Table 6-11: LPA Errors
n Step
Action
If the LPA Modules continuously report alarms, cycle power by resetting the applicable DC PDA
Circuit Breakers.
Establish an MMI Session with the LPA (Table 3-14), connecting the cable to the applicable MMI
Port on the ETIB.
2a
Type alarms at the HyperTerminal Window Prompt and press Enter.
– The resulting display may provide an indication of the problem.
2b
Call Field Support for further assistance.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-11
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Table 6-12: BLO Calibration Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the Power Meter or Communications System Analyzer is configured correctly.
– Refer to the Test Equipment Set–up section of Chapter 3, and is connected to the proper BTS
TX Antenna Connector.
If a Power Meter is being used, perform the following actions.
2a
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with Cal Factors from the Power
Sensor.
– Refer to Appendix F.
2b
Verify that the Power Sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0 dBm)
Power Ref Signal.
2c
Verify communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working by checking that the Meter
Display is showing RES :
Verify that the parameters in the bts–#.cdf File are set correctly for the BTS Operating Band as
follows:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass = 1; Freq_Band = 16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass = 0; Freq_Band = 8
Verify that no LPA on the carrier is in Alarm State (rapidly flashing red LED).
– If any LPAs are in Alarm State, proceed to Step 5.
NOTE
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
Reset the LPA(s) by pulling the applicable circuit breaker on the DC PDA.
After 5 seconds, push the circuit breaker back in.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.
– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, proceed to Step 8.
6-12
Power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry the procedure.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Calibration
– continued
Calibration Audit Failure
Table 6-13: Calibration Audit Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the Power Meter or Communications System Analyzer is configured correctly.
– Refer to the Test Equipment Set–up section of Chapter 3), and is connected to the proper BTS
TX Antenna Connector.
If a Power Meter is being used, perform the following actions.
2a
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with Cal Factors from the Power
Sensor.
– Refer to Appendix F.
2b
Verify that the Power Sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0 dBm)
Power Ref Signal.
2c
Verify communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working by checking that the Meter
Display is showing RES :.
Verify that no LPAs on the carrier are in Alarm State (rapidly flashing red LED).
– If any LPAs are in Alarm State, proceed to Step 4.
Reset the LPA(s) by performing the following actions.
4a
Pull the applicable circuit breaker on the DC PDA, and,
4b
After 5 seconds, push the circuit breaker back in.
After Calibration, the BLO Data must be re-loaded to the BBX Cards before auditing.
– Click on the BBX(s), and in the BTS Menu Bar select Device > Download >BLO.
– Re-try the audit.
Verify that the GPIB Adapter is not locked up.
– Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs are ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
– If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, proceed to Step 7.
Power Cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and re–try.
If Calibration is being performed for the Redundant BBX, ensure that the Single–Sided BLO
Check Box is not checked in the CDMA Test Parameters Test Set–up Window.
If additional items, such as Directional Couplers or Combiners, have been installed in the TX
Path, make sure that one of the following has been done:
S Verify BLO Check Box in the CDMA Test Parameters Test Set–up window is unchecked.
S The additional Path Losses have been added into each applicable sector using the Util > Edit >
TX Coupler Loss... Function.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-13
Basic Troubleshooting: RF Path Fault Isolation
Overview
The Optimization (RF Path Characterization or Calibration) and
Post-Calibration (Audit) Procedures measure and limit-check the BTS
reported Transmit and Receive Levels of the path from each BBX to the
back of the frame. When a fault is detected, it is specific to a Receive or
Transmit Path. The Troubleshooting Process in this section determines
the most probable cause of the fault.
As the Calibration and Audit Tests are performed, results are displayed
in the LMF Test Status Report Window. When faults are encountered,
the Test Procedure in progress continues running and displaying any
further faults. If it appears that there are major faults, the test can be
aborted.
The test results can be saved to a bts–#.rpt File in the:\ and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho Value.
– This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be
re-initialized.
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Table 6-18: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify the presence of the RF Signal by switching to the Spectrum Analyzer Screen on the
Communications System Analyzer.
Verify that the PN Offset displayed on analyzer is the same as the PN Offset being used in the
CDF File.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCC Cards based on the extent of the failure).
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-19
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Table 6-19: Multi-FER Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify that the Test Equipment is configured correctly for an FER Test.
Verify that the Test Equipment is locked to the 19.6608 MHz and Even Second Clocks.
– On the HP 8921 Analyzer, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify MCC Cards have been loaded with data and are INS_ACTIVE.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on the extent of the failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCC Cards based on extent
of failure).
Verify that the Antenna Connections to the frame are correct based on the LMF Directions
Messages.
6-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Problem Description
Many Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Card problems may be
resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.
This section describes known CSM problems identified in Field Returns,
some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM Cards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock / GPS
Receiver Operation
If problems are occurring with CSM Card Kit Numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the Suffix with the Kit Number. If the Kit Number
has version “AB,” then replace it with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and
return the Model AB CSM Card to the Repair Center.
No GPS Reference Source
Correct Hardware
Check the CSM Cards for proper hardware configuration for the type of
GPS in use and the SCCP Cage Slot where they are installed.
RF–GPS (Local GPS) – CSM Kit Number SGLN1145, which should
be installed in Slot l, has an on-board GPS Receiver; while Kit Number
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS Receiver..
Remote GPS (RGPS) – Kit Number SGLN4132ED or later, which
should be installed in both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS
Receiver..
Any incorrectly configured board must be returned to the Repair Center.
Do not attempt to change hardware configuration in the field.
– Also, verify that the GPS Antenna is not damaged and is installed
per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM
Card back to the Repair Center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM
Software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an
earlier version of CSM Software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from
the CBSC. Download again with CSM Software Code 3.5 or higher.
Return the CSM Card back to the Repair Center if the attempt to reload
fails.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-21
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
– continued
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error
This problem is caused by an incorrect Reference (Clock) Source
Configuration performed in the field by software download. CSM Kit
Numbers SGLN1145 and SGLN4132 must have the proper Reference
Sources configured, as shown in Table 6-20, to function correctly.
Table 6-20: CSM Reference (Clock) Sources by GPS Type and Kit Number
GPS Type
CSM Kit No.
CSM
Slot No.
Reference Source Configuration
SGLN1145
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = HSO
SGLN4132
Without GPS
Receiver
Primary = Mate GPS
Backup = HSO
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = HSO
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = HSO
RF GPS
REMOTE
GPS
Hardware
Configuration
SGLN4132ED
or later
Without GPS
Receiver
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS Acquisition. Check the
Accuracy Flag Status and/or current position. Refer to the CSM System
Time/GPS and HSO Verification section of Chapter 3.
At least one satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed”
Mode, and four satellites should be visible and tracked for the
“estimated” Mode. Also, verify that the correct Base Site Position Data
is being used in “surveyed” Mode.
6-22
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane
Introduction
The SCCP Backplane is a multi–layer printed circuit board that
interconnects all of the SCCP Cards and Modules. The complexity of
this board lends itself to possible improper diagnoses when problems
occur.
Connector Functionality
The following Connector Overview describes the major types of
Backplane Connectors along with the functionality of each. This will
assist the CFE to:
S Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
S Isolate problems to a specific cable or connector.
Span Line Connector
The 50–pin Span Line Connector provides a primary and secondary (if
used) Span Line Interface to each GLI in the SCCP Cage. The Span Line
is used for MM/EMX Switch Control of the Master GLI and also all of
the BBX Traffic.
Power Input (Return A and B Connectors)
Provides 27 Volt Input for use by the Power Supply Modules.
Power Supply Module Interface
Each Power Supply Module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP Backplane. These are:
– VCC/Ground Input Connector
– Harting–style Multiple Pin Interface
– +15V Analog Ground Output Connector
The Transceiver Power Module converts 27 Volts to a regulated +15,
+6.5, +5.0 Volts to be used by the SCCP Cage Cards.
GLI Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU Digital Connector and a
6–conductor COAXial Connector for RDM Distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI Cards in the SCCP Backplane.
GLI Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These SMB Connectors are located on the SCCP Backplane and connect
to the GLI Card. This interface provides all the Control and Data
Communications over the Ethernet LAN between the Master GLI, the
Redundant GLI, and the LMF.
BBX Connector
Each BBX Connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU Digital Connector
and two 6–conductor COAXial Connectors. These connectors provide
DC, Digital, and RF Inputs/Outputs for the BBX Cards in the SCCP
Backplane.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-23
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane
– continued
CIO Connectors
S RF RX Antenna Path Signal Inputs are routed through RX Paths of
the DRDCs or TRDCs at the RF Interface Panel (rear of the frame),
and through COAXial Cables to the two MPC Cards.
The three “A” (Main) Signals go to one MPC; the three “B”
(Diversity) Signals to the other. The MPC outputs the
low–noise–amplified signals through the SCCP Backplane to the CIO
where the signals are split and sent to the appropriate BBX.
S A Digital Bus then routes the Baseband Signal through the BBX, to
the SCCP Backplane, and then on to the MCC Slots.
S Digital TX Antenna Path Signals originate at the MCC Cards. Each
output is routed from the MCC Slot through the SCCP Backplane to
the appropriate BBX.
S TX RF Path Signal originates from the BBX, travels through the
SCCP Backplane to the CIO, through the CIO, and then through
multi-conductor COAXial Cabling to the Trunking Module and LPA
Modules in the LPA Shelf.
SCCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
The following tables provide standard procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP Backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
NOTE
All steps in all tables should be followed before any
attempt to replace the SCCP Backplane.
6-24
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane
– continued
Digital Control Problems
No GLI Control via LMF (all GLI Cards)
Table 6-21: No GLI Control Through LMF (All GLI Cards)
n Step
Action
Check the Ethernet LAN for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Ensure that the LAN IN and OUT Connectors in the Power Entry Compartment are properly
terminated.
Ensure that the proper IP Address is entered in the Network Login Tab of the LMF Login Screen.
Logout and exit from the LMF.
Restart the LMF.
Login to the BTS again.
Verify SCCP Backplane Shelf ID DIP Switch is set correctly.
Visually check the Master GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the Master GLI with a known good GLI.
No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI Cards)
Table 6-22: No GLI Control Through Span Line Connection (Both GLI Cards)
n Step
Action
Verify that the SCCP Backplane Shelf ID DIP Switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLI Cards are correctly configured in the OMC–R/CBSC Database.
Verify that the Span Configurations set in the GLI Cards match those in the OMC–R/CBSC
Database.
– Refer to Table 6-47.
Visually check the Master GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the Master GLI with a known good GLI.
Check the Span Line Cabling from the Punchblock to the Master GLI for proper connection and
damage.
Table 6-23: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over Co–located GLI
n Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMC–R/CBSC Database.
Check the Ethernet Connections for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Visually check all GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-25
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane
– continued
No AMR Control (MGLI good)
Table 6-24: MGLI Control Good – No Control Over AMR
n Step
Action
Visually check the Master GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the Master GLI with a known good GLI.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf
Table 6-25: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBX Cards
n Step
Action
Visually check all GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check BBX Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Table 6-26: BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
n Step
Action
Visually check all GLI Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check all Span Line Distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements
Table 6-27: No MCC–1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements
n Step
6-26
Action
Verify Channel Elements on a co–located MCC of the same type.
(CDF MccType Codes: MCC8E = 0; MCC24E = 2; MCC–1X = 3)
Check MCC Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace it with a known good MCC of the same
type.
If no Channel Elements are active on any MCC, verify the Clock Reference to the CIO.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane
– continued
DC Power Problems
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS Equipment.
This test must be carried out with a second person present,
acting in a safety role.
Remove all rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to
beginning this test.
No DC Input Voltage to SCCP Cage Power Supply Modules
Table 6-28: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Verify the DC Power is applied to the BTS Frame.
Determine if any circuit breakers have tripped.
S If a breaker has tripped, proceed to Step 3.
S If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or subassembly within the SCCP
Cage.
– Perform the tests in Table 2-2 to attempt to isolate the module.
Remove all cards and modules from the SCCP Cage.
Reset the circuit breaker.
S If it does reset, proceed to Step 5.
S If it does not reset or trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame
or DC PDA.
Verify that the PS1 and PS2 Circuit Breakers on the DC PDA are functional.
Remove the BTS Frame Rear Access Panel (Figure 2-2), and use a voltmeter to determine if the
Input Voltage is being routed to the SCCP Backplane.
Measure the DC Voltage Levels between:
S The PWR_IN_A and PWR_RTN_A Contacts on the extreme right side at the rear of the
backplane.
S The PWR_IN_B and PWR_RTN_B Contacts on the extreme right side at the rear of the
backplane.
NOTE
If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or circuit breaker problem within the frame
or DC PDA.
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the PS1 and PS2 Power Supply Module
Connectors.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-27
Troubleshooting: SCCP Backplane
– continued
Table 6-28: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Replace the Power Supply Modules with known good modules.
If Steps 1 through 7 fail to indicate a problem, an SCCP Backplane failure has occurred (possibly
an open trace).
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI, BBX,
or Switch Module
Table 6-29: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Cage Module Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
If it has not been done, perform the procedure in Table 6-28.
Inspect the SCCP Cage Card Connectors (both card and backplane) for damage.
Replace suspect cards with known good cards.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Table 6-30: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
6-28
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable Connectors and Backplane Connectors for damage in all the affected
card slots.
Perform the steps outlined in the RF Path Troubleshooting Flowchart in Figure 6-1.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: RFDS
Introduction
The RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification and
Post-Calibration Audits that limit-check the RFDS-generate and
reported Receive Levels of every path from the RFDS through the
Directional Coupler Coupled Paths. In the event of test failure, refer to
the following tables.
All Tests Fail
Table 6-31: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Action
Check the TX Calibration Equipment for proper operation by performing the following actions.
1a
Manually set the Signal Generator Output Attenuator to the lowest Output Power Setting.
1b
Connect the Output Port to the Spectrum Analyzer RF Input Port.
Set the Signal Generator Output Attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the RF Output.
Verify that the Spectrum Analyzer can do the following:
– Receive the signal.
– Indicate the correct Signal Strength (accounting for the Cable Insertion Loss).
– Indicate the approximate frequency.
Visually inspect the RF Cabling.
Make sure that the Directional Coupler Forward Port and Reflected Port are connected to the RFDS
Antenna Select Unit on the RFDS.
Check the wiring against the Site Documentation Wiring Diagram or the 1X SC4812T Lite Hardware
Installation manual (68P09262A57)
Verify that all changes to the RFDS Parameter Settings have been downloaded.
Status the TSU to verify that the TSIC and SUA Software Versions are correct.
Check to see that all RFDS Cards show green on the Front Panel LEDs.
Visually check for external damage.
10
If any card LEDs do not show green, replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.
– Re–test after replacement.
All RX and TX Paths Fail
If every Receive or Transmit Path fails, the problem most likely lies with
the RF Converter Card or the Transceiver Card. Replace the RFDS with
a known–good unit and retest.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-29
Troubleshooting: RFDS
– continued
All Tests Fail on a Single
Antenna
If all path failures are on one Antenna Port (Forward or Reflected),
perform the checks in Table 6-32.
Table 6-32: RFDS Fault Isolation – All Tests Fail on Single Antenna Path Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Action
Visually inspect the frame internal RFDS Cabling to the suspect TRDC or DRDC.
Verify that the Forward and Reflected Ports connect to the correct RFDS Antenna Select Unit
positions on the RFDS ASU Card.
– Refer to the RFDS Installation Manual for details.
Replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.
Replace the RF Cables between the affected TRDC or DRDC and the RFDS.
6-30
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive Plug-in Cards/Modules has a bi-color (green and
red) Status Indicator LED located on the card/module Front Panel. The
LED is labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator
appears yellow.
Each plug-in card/module, except for the Fan Module, has its own Alarm
(Fault) Detection Circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM
LED.
The Fan TACH Signal of each Fan Module is monitored by the AMR
Card. Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of
the PWR/ALM LED on the Fan Module.
Module LED Status (except
GLI3, CSM, BBX, MCC)
PWR/ALM LED
Table 6-33 describes the states of the Card/Module Status Indicator
LEDs.
Table 6-33: Card/Module PWR/ALM LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid GREEN
NORMAL (Fault–Free) Mode
– No alarm present.
Solid RED
Alarm (Fault) Mode due to electrical or hardware
failure.
– An alarm is being reported.
Note that an Alarm (Fault) Indication may or may not be due to a
complete card/module failure and normal service may or may not be
reduced or interrupted.
Power Supply Module LED
Status Combinations
The Power Supply Module (PWR CNVTR) has its own Alarm (Fault)
Detection Circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
PWR/ALM LED
Table 6-34 describes the states of the bi-color Status Indicator LED.
Table 6-34: Card/Module PWR/ALM LED States
LED State
FEB 2005
Device Status
Solid GREEN
NORMAL (Fault–Free) Mode
– No alarm present.
Solid RED
Alarm (Fault) Mode due to electrical or hardware
failure.
– An alarm is being reported.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-31
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
CSM LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSM Cards contain on-board Alarm Detection. Hardware and
Software/Firmware Alarms are indicated via the Front Panel LEDs.
Refer to Table 6-35.
After the Memory Tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM Code from the
Flash EPROM, if available.
– If not available, the OOS–ROM Code is loaded from the Flash
EPROM.
Table 6-35: CSM Card PWR/ALM LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid GREEN
Master CSM is locked on to the GPS or
LFR while operating in INS_ACTIVE or
INS_STANDBY Mode.
– No alarm present.
Solid RED
1. Color during System Initialization.
2. Alarm (Fault) Mode
– An alarm is being reported.
Fast Flashing GREEN
Standby CSM is locked on to the GPS or
LFR while in INS_STANDBY Mode.
– No alarm present.
Alternating
Slow Flashing RED/
Fast Flashing GREEN
OOS_ROM Mode
– An alarm is being reported.
Fast Flashing GREEN
1. OOS_RAM Mode
2. INS_ACTIVE Mode in DUMB
Configuration.
– No alarm present.
Alternating
Fast Flashing RED/
Fast Flashing GREEN
OOS_RAM Mode
– An alarm is being reported.
Alternating
Fast Flashing RED/
Slow Flashing
GREEN
OOS_RAM Mode and attempting to lock
on to the GPS Signal.
– An alarm is being reported.
table continued on next page
6-32
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-35: CSM Card PWR/ALM LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid YELLOW
After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot.
Color during the SRAM Test and the Flash
EPROM Code Check Test.
– If SRAM or Flash EPROM Tests fail,
the LED changes to Steady RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.
OFF
1. No DC Power to the card.
2. The on-board fuse is open.
FREQ Monitor Connector
A Test Port provided on the CSM Front Panel via a BNC Receptacle
allows monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz Clock Signal generated by the
CSM. When both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS)
condition, the CSM 2 Clock Signal Frequency is the same as that output
by CSM 1.
The Clock Signal is a Sine Wave Signal with a Minimum Amplitude of
+2 dBm (800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω Load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A Test Port provided at the CSM Front Panel via a BNC Receptacle
allows monitoring of the “Even Second Clock” Reference Signal
generated by the CSM Cards.
At this port, the Reference Signal is a Transistor–Transistor Logic (TTL)
Active–High Signal with a Pulse Width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector
Behind the Front Panel – only accessible when the card is partially
extended from its SCCP Cage Slot. The RS–232 MMI Port Connector is
intended to be used primarily in the development or factory
environment, but may be used in the field for Debug/Maintenance
purposes.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-33
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel LED and Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
GLI3 LED Status Combinations
The GLI3 Card Indicators, Controls, and Connectors are described below
and shown in Figure 6-3.
The Front Panel Indicators and Controls consist of:
S Four LEDs
S One Pushbutton
ACTIVE LED
Table 6-36: GLI Card ACTIVE LED States
LED State
6-34
Device Status
Solid GREEN
INS_ACTIVE Mode
– This indication means that the GLI has Shelf
Control and is providing control of the
digital interfaces.
OFF
Not Active (i.e., INS_STANDBY).
– The Mate GLI is INS_ACTIVE and
operating normally.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
MASTER LED
Table 6-37: GLI Card MASTER LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid GREEN
GLI is Master (also referred to as MGLI).
– The GLI Card located in the Top Shelf is
designated by hardware as the
INS_ACTIVE GLI Card.
– The GLI Card located in the Bottom Shelf is
designated by hardware as the
INS_STANDBY GLI Card.
OFF
GLI is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM LED
Table 6-38: GLI Card ALARM LED States
LED State
Device Status
Slow Flashing
GREEN
INS_ACTIVE or INS_STANDBY Mode.
Solid GREEN
Turns ON briefly during System Initialization
when the STATUS LED turns OFF.
OFF
GLI is operating normally.
STATUS LED
Table 6-39: GLI Card STATUS LED States
LED State
Device Status
Slow Flashing
GREEN
INS_ACTIVE or INS_STANDBY
Solid GREEN
Turns ON briefly during System Initialization
when the ALARM LED turns OFF.
OFF
GLI is operating normally.
SPANS LED
Table 6-40: GLI Card STATUS LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid GREEN
GLI is operating normally.
Solid YELLOW
One or more of the equipped initialized Span
Lines is receiving a Remote Alarm Indication
Signal from the Remote End of the Span Line.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-35
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-40: GLI Card STATUS LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid RED
One or more of the equipped initialized Span
Lines is in Alarm Mode.
OFF
GLI is powered down, in Initialization Mode, or
in INS_STANDBY Mode.
GLI3 Pushbutton and
Connectors
Figure 6-3 shows the Front Panel of the GLI3 Card and includes a
description of the components.
RESET Pushbutton
Depressing the RESET Pushbutton causes a partial reset of the CPU and
a reset of all board devices. GLI3 will be placed in the OOS_ROM state
(blue).
MMI Connector
The RS–232MMI Port Connector is intended primarily for development
or factory use but may be used in the field for Debug/Maintenance
purposes.
6-36
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel
LED
OPERATING STATUS
Connects to either a BPR or Expansion Cage and is wired as an
Ethernet hub.
BPR B
Connects to either a BPR or Expansion Cage and is wired as an
Ethernet hub.
AUX
Wired as an Ethernet hub for direct connection to a personal comput
er with a standard Ethernet cable. It allows connection of an Ethernet
sniffer" when the Ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon
itoring. This port may also be connected to the optional Motorola
MOSCAD−L Network Fault Management unit using a Crossover
Ethernet cable.
RESET
Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.
ALARM
OFF − operating normally.
ON − briefly during powerup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (inservice).
Span
OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby.
GREEN − operating normally.
YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end.
RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state.
An RS232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
Dual 100BASE–T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
GLI
Reset Switch
SPAN
ALARM
RESET
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
MMI
ACT
STA
MMI
100BASE–T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
AUX
Supports the cross−coupled Ethernet circuits to the Mate GLI using a
standard Ethernet straight cable.
100BASE–T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion Port
BPR B
GLI
BPR A
BPR A
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
STATUS
OFF − operating normally.
ON − briefly during powerup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (inservice).
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails.
ON − active card operating normally.
OFF − standby card operating normally.
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
BBX LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
All Broadband Transceiver (BBX) Cards have their own Alarm (Fault)
Detection Circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
Table 6-41 describes the states of the bi-color PWR/ALM LED.
Table 6-41: BBX Card PWR/ALM LED States
Physical and Alarm State
FEB 2005
Off
Red
Green
Microprocessor in Reset
–––
Continuous
–––
OOS–ROM – No alarm
1.4s
–––
0.2s
OOS–ROM – Alarm
–––
1.4s
0.2s
OOS–RAM – No alarm
0.2s
–––
0.2s
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-37
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-41: BBX Card PWR/ALM LED States
Physical and Alarm State
Off
Red
Green
OOS–RAM – Alarm
–––
0.2s
0.2s
In Service – No alarm
–––
–––
Continuous
In Service – Alarm
–––
0.2s
1.4s
ACTIVE LED
Table 6-42 describes the states of the ACTIVE LED:
Table 6-42: BBX Card ACTIVE LED States
Physical and Alarm State
Off
Red
Green
Dekeyed
Continuous
–––
–––
Keyed
–––
–––
Continuous
MCC LED Status Combinations
The Multi-Channel CDMA (MCC–24/MCC–8E/MCC–1X) Card has
Status Indicator LEDs and Connectors as described below. Refer to
Figure 6-4. Note that the figure does not show the connectors; they are
concealed by the removable lens. The location of the LEDs are as
follows:
S PWR/ALM LED is at the top of the card.
S ACTIVE LED is at the bottom of the card.
PWR/ALM LED
Table 6-43: MCC Card PWR/ALM LED States
LED State
Device Status
Solid RED
1. Briefly lit during System Initialization.
2. Alarm (Fault) Mode.
– An alarm is being reported.
OFF
Operating normally.
ACTIVE LED
Table 6-44: MCC Card ACTIVE LED States
LED State
6-38
Device Status
Solid GREEN
Card is code–loaded, enabled, and operating
in INS_ACTIVE Mode, on-line, processing
traffic.
– No alarm present.
Slow Flashing GREEN
Card is not code–loaded.
– No alarm present.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-44: MCC Card ACTIVE LED States
LED State
Device Status
Fast Flashing GREEN
Card is code–loaded but not enabled.
– No alarm present.
Solid RED
Alarm (Fault) Mode.
– An alarm is being reported.
Alternating
Slow Flashing RED /
Slow Flashing GREEN
The CHI Bus is inactive after System
Initialization.
OFF
1. Card is inactive.
2. Card is off-line.
3. Card is not processing traffic.
Both PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
Table 6-45: MCC Card PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LED States
LED State
Solid RED
Device Status
1. Card is in Reset Mode.
2. The BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
RS–232 Port Connector:
This Port Connector (four pin) is intended to be used primarily in
Development and Factory environments, but may be used in the field for
Debugging purposes.
– A Removable Lens covers this Port Connector.
The RJ–14 Ethernet Port Connector:
This Port Connector (eight pin) is intended to be used primarily in the
Development environment, but may be used in the field for High Data
Rate Debugging purposes.
– A Removable Lens covers this Port Connector.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-39
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Figure 6-4: MCC24 and MCC–1X Front Panel LEDs and LED Indications
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
LED
COLOR
PWR/ALM
RED
OFF – Operating normally
ON – Briefly during Power–up and during
failure conditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
ACTIVE
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY FLASHING – Card is Code Loaded but
not enabled
SLOW FLASHING – Card is not Code Loaded
ON – Card is Code Loaded and enabled (INS_ACT)
ON – 1) Briefly during Power–up
2) Continuously during fault conditions
SLOW FLASHING (alternately with green) –
Concentration Highway Interface (CHI) Bus
inactive on Power–up
4812ETL0030–1
CLPA LED Status
Combinations
ETIB Board LED for the LPA Module
In the SC 4812T Lite Platform, the CLPA Module does not contain an
LEDs. The LED on the CLPA Fan Module provides visual operational
information for the CLPA Module. Refer to Figure 6-5.
Each LPA Module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB Module
next to the MMI Connector. Refer to Table 6-46.
6-40
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-46: LPA ETIB Module LED
LED State
Device Status
Solid GREEN
INS_ACTIVE Mode
– No alarm present.
Alternating Flashing
GREEN/ RED
INS_ACTIVE Mode
S If a BBX is keyed, a Low Power
Alarm is present.
S If a BBX is not keyed, no alarm is
present.
Flashing RED
Alarm (Fault) Mode
– An LPA Alarm is being reported.
Figure 6-5: CLPA Module
TOP
CLPA
MODULE
BOTTOM
CLPA
MODULE
FAN
MODULE
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-41
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Table 6-47: Control Link Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Connect the LMF Computer to the MMI Port on the applicable MGLI3/GLI3 as shown in
Figure 6-6.
Start an MMI Communication Session with the applicable MGLI3/GLI3 by using the Windows
Desktop Shortcut Icon.
– Refer to Table 3-14.
Once the connection window opens, press the LMF Computer Enter Key until the GLI3>
Prompt is obtained.
At the GLI3> Prompt, enter:
config ni current (equivalent of Span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for Span Equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 Spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default Link Speed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI Spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC Span Configuration requires it.
The Span Configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMC–R/CBSC Database for
the BTS.
S If they do, proceed to Step 6.
S If they do not, proceed to Table 6-48.
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLI Cards.
If the Span Settings are correct, verify the EDLC Parameters using the show Command.
– Check for any Alarm Conditions that indicate the Span is not operating correctly.
S Try looping back the Span Line from the DSX Panel to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
S Listen for a Control Tone on the appropriate Timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
table continued on next page
6-42
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-47: Control Link Failure Troubleshooting Procedure
n Step
Action
Exit the GLI MMI Session and HyperTerminal Connection by performing the following actions.
8a
Select File from the Connection Window Menu Bar.
8b
Select Exit from the Pull–down Menu.
Figure 6-6: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail
STATUS LED
STATUS
RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE
To MMI Port
RESET
Pushbutton
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
MMI Port
Connector
ACTIVE LED
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
FEB 2005
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-43
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
NOTE
Perform the following procedure ONLY if Span
Configurations loaded in the MGLI3/GLI3s do not match
those in the OMC–R/CBSC database, AND ONLY when
the exact Configuration Data is available.
Loading incorrect Span Configuration Data will render the
site inoperable.
Table 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration Procedure
n Step
Action
If not previously done, connect the LMF Computer to the MMI Port on the applicable
MGLI3/GLI3 as shown in Figure 6-6.
If there is no MMI Communication Session in progress with the applicable MGLI3/GLI3, initiate
one by using the Windows Desktop Shortcut Icon.
– Refer to Table 3-14.
At the GLI3> Prompt, enter the following command
GLI3>config ni format
– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option
Next available options:
LIST –
option : Span Option
E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
no TS16
E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16
E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
TS16
E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16
T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS
T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default
J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS>
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) Spans will be set to the same format.
table continued on next page
6-44
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration Procedure
n Step
Action
To set or change the Span Type, enter the correct option from the list at the Entry Prompt (>), as
shown in the following example.
> T1_2
– An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI3>
NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list.
– If the entry is typed incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI3>
If the current MGLI/GLI Span Rate must be changed, enter the following MMI Command:
config ni Link Speed
– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
Next available options:
LIST – Link Speed : Span Linkspeed
56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)
64K : 64K (default for all other Span Configurations)
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) Spans will be set to the same Link Speed.
To set or change the Span Link Speed, enter the required option from the list at the Entry Prompt
(>), as shown in the following example:
> 64K
– An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed.
GLI3>
It will take effect after the next reset.
NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list.
– If the entry is typed incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI3>
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-45
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration Procedure
n Step
Action
If the Span Equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI Command:
config ni equal
– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal
Next available options:
LIST –
Span : Span
a : Span
b : Span
c : Span
d : Span
e : Span
f : Span
Span equal
At the Entry Prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the Span to be changed as shown in
the following example:
> a
– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal
Next available options:
LIST –
equal : Span Equalization
0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1)
1 : 132–262 feet
2 : 263–393 feet
3 : 394–524 feet
4 : 525–655 feet
5 : LONG HAUL
6 : 75 OHM
7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)
At the Entry Prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in the
following example:
> 0
– The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
> 0
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI3>
10
Repeat Step 7 through Step 9 for each in–use Span.
table continued on next page
6-46
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-48: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration Procedure
n Step
11
Action
Press the RESET Button on the MGLI3/GLI3 for changes to take effect.
* IMPORTANT
After executing the config ni format, config ni Link Speed, and/or config ni equal
commands, the affected MGLI/GLI Card MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult the Site Documentation for Span Type and Link
Speed used at the site.
12
Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify Span Settings are as
required:
config ni current (equivalent of Span view command)
– The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – 0–131 feet
Span B – 0–131 feet
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: 64K
Currently, the link is running at 64K
The actual rate is 0
S If the Span Configuration is correct, return to Step 6 of Table 6-47.
S If the Span Configuration is not correct, proceed to Step 13.
13
Perform the applicable step from this table to change it.
14
Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 to verify required changes have been programmed.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
6-47
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Notes
6-48
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
A
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix Content
FEB 2005
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-7
A-9
A-9
A-10
Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
A-11
A-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-1
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Deliveries
Per established
procedures
−
Floor Plan
Verified
Comments
Inter Frame Cables:
−
−
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Per procedure
Per procedure
−
Power
Per procedure
Factory Data:
−
−
BBX
Test Panel
Per procedure
Per procedure
−
RFDS
Per procedure
−
Site Temperature
−
Dress Covers/Brackets
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Frame ID DIP Switches
Per Site
Equipage
−
Ethernet LAN
Verification
Verified per
procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
Pre–Power and Initial Power
Tests
Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist
OK
−
Parameter
Specification
Pre–Power–up Tests
Comments
Table 2-2
Internal Cables:
−
−
Span
CSM
Verified
Verified
−
Power
Verified
Ethernet Connectors:
−
LAN A Ohms
Verified
−
LAN B Ohms
Verified
−
−
LAN A Shield
LAN B Shield
Installed
Installed
−
−
−
LAN A IN & OUT
Terminators
Isolated
LAN B IN & OUT
Terminators
Installed
Isolated
Ethernet Boots
−
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
Installed
−
Initial Power–up Tests
Table 2-5
−
Frame Fans
Operational
−
LEDs
Illuminated
Comments:_________________________________________________________
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-3
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
General Optimization Checklist
Table A-5: General Optimization Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
Preparing the LMF
−
−
Load LMF Software
Create site–specific BTS directory
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
−
Create HyperTerminal Connection
Table 3-4
−
LMF–to–BTS Connection
Table 3-6
−
−
Verify GLI2 Ethernet Address Settings
Ping LAN A
Table 6-4
Table 3-15
−
Ping LAN B
Table 3-15
−
Table 3-16
−
Verify ROM Code Loads for Software
Release
Download/Enable MGLI2
−
Download/Enable GLI2
Table 6-47
−
Set Site Span Configuration
Table 3-19
−
Set CSM Clock Source
Table 3-20
−
Enable CSM Cards
Table 3-18
−
−
Download/Enable MCC Cards (24/8E/1X)
Download BBX Cards (2 or 1X)
Table 3-18
Table 3-52
−
Program TSU NAM
−
Test Set Calibration
Table 3-36
−
Test Cable Calibration
Table 3-32
Table 3-17
Table 3-17
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
−
Parameter
Specification
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
Comments
Verify parameter
tracking satellites
−
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify:
Estimated or
Surveyed
−
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in
msec and cm.
Also convert to
deg min sec.
−
Current Position: satellites tracked
Verify parameter
as appropriate
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
−
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
−
Current Reference Source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments:_________________________________________________________
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-5
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-7: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter
Carrier
OK
LPA
2:1
3–Sector
BP
3–Sector
Specification
−
1A
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1B
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1C
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1D
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
3A
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
3B
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
3C
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
3D
C2
C2
No Alarms
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
TX Bay Level Offset / Power
Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations
One Carrier and Two Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-8: TX BLO Calibration (Three Sector: One Carrier and Two Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB
Calibrate Carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB
(+5 dB) prior to Calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB
Calibrate Carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB
(+5 dB) prior to Calibration
BBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB
BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB
Calibration Audit
Carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain Set
Resolution Post–Calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB
Calibration Audit
Carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain Set
Resolution Post–Calibration
BBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-7
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
Two Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (Three Sector: Two Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB
Calibrate Carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to Calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB
Calibrate Carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 45 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to Calibration
BBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB
BBX2–1, ANT–1A = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1A = ______dB
Calibration Audit
Carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain Set Resolution
Post–Calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2A = ______dB
BBX2–3, ANT–3A = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3A = ______dB
BBX2–4, ANT–1B = ______dB
−
−
BBX2–r, ANT–1B = ______dB
Calibration Audit
Carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for Gain Set Resolution
Post–Calibration
BBX2–5, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2B = ______dB
BBX2–6, ANT–3B = ______dB
−
BBX2–r, ANT–3B = ______dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-10: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1A
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2A
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3A
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1B
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2B
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3B
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-11: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1A
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2A
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3A
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1B
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2B
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3B
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-9
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
– continued
Alarm Verification
Table A-12: CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Verify CDI Alarm
Input Operation.
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm Sets/Clears
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Site Serial Number Check List
Date
Site
SCCP Cage
NOTE
For BBX Cards and MCC Cards, enter the type as well as
Serial Number; for example, BBX2, BBX–1X, MCC8,
MCC24, MCC–1X.
Site I/O A
Site I/O B
SCCP Cage
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fan–1
Fan–2
GLI2–1
GLI2–2
GLI2–2
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–R1
MCC–1
MCC–2
MCC–3
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
A-11
A
Site Serial Number Check List
– continued
MCC–4
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
LPA Modules
PA 1A
PA 1B
PA 1C
PA 1D
PA 3A
PA 3B
PA 3C
PA 3D
A-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-1
B-1
B-1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
PN Offset Background
All Channel Elements transmitted from a BTS in a specific 1.25 MHz
CDMA Channel are orthogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh Code
Functions; additionally, they are also spread by a Quadrature Pair of PN
Sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) Sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN Offset per Sector is stored on the BBX Cards, where the
corresponding I and Q Registers reside.
The PN Offset Values are determined by BTS Sector (Antenna) based on
the applicable CDF Data Field Content. A breakdown of this
information is found in Table B-1.
PN Offset Usage
There are three basic RF Chip Delays currently in use. It is important to
determine which RF Chip Delay is valid to be able to test the BTS
Functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF FineTxAdj
Value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with “image
data”.
The FineTxAdj Value is used to compensate for the Processing Delay
(approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting
IS–97 Specifications.
Observe the following guidelines:
S If the FineTxAdj Value in the CDF is 101 (65 HEX), the FineTxAdj
has not been set. The I and Q Values from the 0 Chip Delay Column
of Table B-1 MUST be used.
If the FineTxAdj Value in the CDF File is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj
has been set for the 14 Chip Delay column of Table B-1.
S If the FineTxAdj value in the CDF File is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj
has been set for the 13Chip Delay column of Table B-1.
NOTE
CDF File I and Q Values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX.
If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX Value.
If necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal
before comparing them to CDF File I and Q Value
Assignments.
– If a Qualcomm Mobile is used, select I and Q Values from the
13–Chip Delay column of Table B-1.
– If a mobile is used that does not have the “One Chip Offset”
problem (any mobile meeting the IS–97 Specification), select from
the 14–Chip Delay column of Table B-1.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-1
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
NOTE
If the wrong I and Q Values are used with the wrong
FineTxAdj Parameter, System Timing problems will
occur.
This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”
over several Walsh Codes (instead of the single Walsh
Code that it was assigned to), causing erratic operation.
Evidence of Smearing is usually identified by Walsh
Channels not at correct levels or being present when not
selected in the Code Domain Power Test.
B-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29673
16146
2350
7203
19657
28816
19740
21695
2916
18923
27855
24350
30205
14960
12592
13141
27167
7770
11513
30409
2025
21210
15131
9000
10028
18023
29662
8719
2551
4651
8577
2599
2303
12402
8590
17749
16902
11925
27824
22053
5015
8492
18968
25115
26607
15050
3961
19051
29602
31940
22565
25581
29082
8699
32082
18921
1128
27217
547
10601
21812
28727
9445
29367
11210
10084
6177
23525
5917
23153
30973
31679
25887
18994
6879
5889
18647
3592
1181
12920
23028
5201
19842
8854
5315
3406
7175
23367
32489
1326
9949
1005
12968
31109
5976
28761
32710
22548
14099
21761
4231
23681
73E9
3F12
092E
1C23
4CC9
7090
4D1C
54BF
0B64
49EB
6CCF
5F1E
75FD
3A70
3130
3355
6A1F
1E5A
2CF9
76C9
07E9
52DA
3B1B
2328
272C
4667
73DE
220F
09F7
122B
2181
0A27
08FF
3072
218E
4555
4206
2E95
6CB0
5625
1397
212C
4A18
621B
67EF
3ACA
0F79
4A6B
73A2
7CC4
5825
63ED
719A
21FB
7D52
49E9
0468
6A51
0223
2969
5534
7037
24E5
72B7
2BCA
2764
1821
5BE5
171D
5A71
78FD
7BBF
651F
4A32
1ADF
1701
48D7
0E08
049D
3278
59F4
1451
4D82
2296
14C3
0D4E
1C07
5B47
7EE9
052E
26DD
03ED
32A8
7985
1758
7059
7FC6
5814
3713
5501
1087
5C81
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
4096
9167
22417
966
14189
29150
18245
1716
11915
20981
24694
11865
6385
27896
25240
30877
30618
26373
314
17518
21927
2245
18105
8792
21440
15493
26677
11299
12081
23833
20281
10676
16981
31964
26913
14080
23842
27197
22933
30220
12443
19854
14842
15006
702
21373
23874
3468
31323
29266
16554
4096
1571
7484
6319
2447
24441
27351
23613
29008
5643
28085
18200
21138
21937
25222
109
6028
22034
15069
4671
30434
11615
19838
14713
241
24083
7621
19144
1047
26152
22402
21255
30179
7408
115
1591
1006
32263
1332
12636
4099
386
29231
25711
10913
8132
20844
13150
18184
19066
29963
1000
23CF
5791
03C6
376D
71DE
4745
06B4
2E8B
51F5
6076
2E59
18F1
6CF8
6298
789D
779A
6705
013A
446E
55A7
08C5
46B9
2258
53C0
3C85
6835
2C23
2F31
5D19
4F39
29B4
4255
7CDC
6921
3700
5D22
6A3D
5995
760C
309B
4D8E
39FA
3A9E
02BE
537D
5D42
0D8C
7A5B
7252
40AA
1000
0623
1D3C
18AF
098F
5F79
6AD7
5C3D
7150
160B
6DB5
4718
5292
55B1
6286
006D
178C
5612
3ADD
123F
76E2
2D5F
4D7E
3979
00F1
5E13
1DC5
4AC8
0417
6628
5782
5307
75E3
1CF0
0073
0637
03EE
7E07
0534
315C
1003
0182
722F
646F
2AA1
1FC4
516C
335E
4708
4A7A
750B
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-3
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
28195
3557
24281
29717
14106
26649
30545
19658
10080
31396
13291
23592
19547
7637
31974
8170
13526
19383
5310
7989
13983
18831
768
22511
22834
8944
18510
3753
13813
27922
27597
26107
30214
9304
24511
11584
11733
7966
12899
14067
14012
23951
10754
13169
8593
11231
1954
12695
26537
4810
2335
7336
30543
10305
17051
23386
9213
11363
17411
29884
2898
28386
2264
17583
5147
8523
3923
5381
6907
8427
20401
4887
24909
1586
19046
26541
28472
3531
3766
32719
7122
30966
15204
2547
8111
17351
87
12765
1160
25368
24804
1302
913
29310
20629
19250
12500
27973
22201
4335
6E23
0DE5
5ED9
7415
371A
6819
7751
4CCA
2760
7AA4
33EB
5C28
4C5B
1DD5
7CE6
1FEA
34D6
4BB7
14BE
1F35
369F
498F
0300
57EF
5932
22F0
484E
0EA9
35F5
6D12
6BCD
65FB
7606
2458
5FBF
2D40
2DD5
1F1E
3263
36F3
36BC
5D8F
2A02
3371
2191
2BDF
07A2
3197
67A9
12CA
091F
1CA8
774F
2841
429B
5B5A
23FD
2C63
4403
74BC
0B52
6EE2
08D8
44AF
141B
214B
0F53
1505
1AFB
20EB
4FB1
1317
614D
0632
4A66
67AD
6F38
0DCB
0EB6
7FCF
1BD2
78F6
3B64
09F3
1FAF
43C7
0057
31DD
0488
6318
60E4
0516
0391
727E
5095
4B32
30D4
6D45
56B9
10EF
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
22575
31456
8148
19043
25438
10938
2311
7392
30714
180
8948
16432
9622
7524
1443
1810
6941
3238
8141
10408
18826
22705
3879
21359
30853
18078
15910
20989
28810
30759
18899
7739
6279
9968
8571
4143
19637
11867
7374
10423
9984
7445
4133
22646
15466
2164
16380
15008
31755
31636
6605
29417
22993
27657
5468
8821
20773
4920
5756
28088
740
23397
19492
26451
30666
15088
26131
15969
24101
12762
19997
22971
12560
31213
18780
16353
12055
30396
24388
1555
13316
31073
6187
21644
9289
4624
467
18133
1532
1457
9197
13451
25785
4087
31190
8383
12995
27438
9297
1676
582F
7AE0
1FD4
4A63
635E
2ABA
0907
1CE0
77FA
00B4
22F4
4030
2596
1D64
05A3
0712
1B1D
0CA6
1FCD
28A8
498A
58B1
0F27
536F
7885
469E
3E26
51FD
708A
7827
49D3
1E3B
1887
26F0
217B
102F
4CB5
2E5B
1CCE
28B7
2700
1D15
1025
5876
3C6A
0874
3FFC
3AA0
7C0B
7B94
19CD
72E9
59D1
6C09
155C
2275
5125
1338
167C
6DB8
02E4
5B65
4C24
6753
77CA
3AF0
6613
3E61
5E25
31DA
4E1D
59BB
3110
79ED
495C
3FE1
2F17
76BC
5F44
0613
3404
7961
182B
548C
2449
1210
01D3
46D5
05FC
05B1
23ED
348B
64B9
0FF7
79D6
20BF
32C3
6B2E
2451
068C
. . . continued on next page
B-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23933
8438
8517
28314
25692
4191
2812
712
6517
7841
25918
16756
15116
23902
13558
2119
2564
7423
6512
17680
15862
19241
24953
21390
1145
27727
6044
3861
13656
11565
297
12902
27970
28276
22482
28791
15777
4382
20439
6714
8829
19329
31479
24994
22969
11646
21344
14327
3175
8385
645
18087
19577
23015
16406
4489
32729
1565
15703
3111
10170
12547
11690
5463
25262
15817
18085
20324
31470
31726
20965
11169
13775
11048
11568
23023
19554
468
3136
16223
21573
24342
32326
10534
28789
17496
20271
22933
2451
19935
7202
8991
9783
1485
25403
7579
14547
20346
27477
11794
5D7D
20F6
2145
6E9A
645C
105F
0AFC
02C8
1975
1EA1
653E
4174
3B0C
5D5E
34F6
0847
0A04
1CFF
1970
4510
3DF6
4B29
6179
538E
0479
6C4F
179C
0F15
3558
2D2D
0129
3266
6D42
6E74
57D2
7077
3DA1
111E
4FD7
1A3A
227D
4B81
7AF7
61A2
59B9
2D7E
5360
37F7
0C67
20C1
0285
46A7
4C79
59E7
4016
1189
7FD9
061D
3D57
0C27
27BA
3103
2DAA
1557
62AE
3DC9
46A5
4F64
7AEE
7BEE
51E5
2BA1
35CF
2B28
2D30
59EF
4C62
01D4
0C40
3F5F
5445
5F16
7E46
2926
7075
4458
4F2F
5995
0993
4DDF
1C22
231F
2637
05CD
633B
1D9B
38D3
4F7A
6B55
2E12
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
25414
7102
20516
19495
17182
11572
25570
6322
8009
26708
6237
32520
31627
3532
24090
20262
18238
2033
25566
25144
29679
5064
27623
13000
31373
13096
26395
15487
29245
26729
12568
24665
8923
19634
29141
73
26482
6397
29818
8153
302
28136
29125
8625
26671
6424
12893
18502
7765
25483
12596
19975
20026
8958
19143
17142
19670
30191
5822
22076
606
9741
9116
12705
17502
18952
15502
17819
4370
31955
30569
7350
26356
32189
1601
19537
25667
4415
2303
16362
28620
6736
2777
24331
9042
107
4779
13065
30421
20210
5651
31017
30719
23104
7799
17865
26951
25073
32381
16581
6346
1BBE
5024
4C27
431E
2D34
63E2
18B2
1F49
6854
185D
7F08
7B8B
0DCC
5E1A
4F26
473E
07F1
63DE
6238
73EF
13C8
6BE7
32C8
7A8D
3328
671B
3C7F
723D
6869
3118
6059
22DB
4CB2
71D5
0049
6772
18FD
747A
1FD9
012E
6DE8
71C5
21B1
682F
1918
325D
4846
1E55
638B
3134
4E07
4E3A
22FE
4AC7
42F6
4CD6
75EF
16BE
563C
025E
260D
239C
31A1
445E
4A08
3C8E
459B
1112
7CD3
7769
1CB6
66F4
7DBD
0641
4C51
6443
113F
08FF
3FEA
6FCC
1A50
0AD9
5F0B
2352
006B
12AB
3309
76D5
4EF2
1613
7929
77FF
5A40
1E77
45C9
6947
61F1
7E7D
40C5
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-5
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
7363
25594
10678
18026
14483
11449
21128
15005
21838
25797
14870
23232
32747
840
25426
12856
29766
25939
28040
5748
639
27761
26921
10236
2908
15135
11094
3091
28406
7023
20176
30481
26763
6676
32048
27701
17686
12727
9305
3184
24247
3865
11738
20588
30874
10260
31618
20223
31635
15560
5439
15530
29297
5748
25036
4793
10492
30054
3649
9467
25356
32310
25534
3882
7259
10817
5773
13227
7969
4525
18483
379
8264
27127
5104
8849
24150
14317
19955
10172
13348
18609
22879
15971
23864
4819
30181
6615
25960
19007
24355
7926
20802
3037
29498
7940
27125
4333
408
26030
1CC3
63FA
29B6
466A
3893
2CB9
5288
3A9D
554E
64C5
3A16
5AC0
7FEB
0348
6352
3238
7446
6553
6D88
1674
027F
6C71
6929
27FC
0B5C
3B1F
2B56
0C13
6EF6
1B6F
4ED0
7711
688B
1A14
7D30
6C35
4516
31B7
2459
0C70
5EB7
0F19
2DDA
506C
789A
2814
7B82
4EFF
7B93
3CC8
153F
3CAA
7271
1674
61CC
12B9
28FC
7566
0E41
24FB
630C
7E36
63BE
0F2A
1C5B
2A41
168D
33AB
1F21
11AD
4833
017B
2048
69F7
13F0
2291
5E56
37ED
4DF3
27BC
3424
48B1
595F
3E63
5D38
12D3
75E5
19D7
6568
4A3F
5F23
1EF6
5142
0BDD
733A
1F04
69F5
10ED
0198
65AE
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
15408
6414
8164
10347
29369
10389
24783
18400
22135
4625
22346
2545
7786
20209
26414
1478
15122
24603
677
13705
13273
14879
6643
23138
28838
9045
10792
25666
11546
15535
16134
8360
14401
26045
24070
30300
13602
32679
16267
9063
19487
12778
27309
12527
953
15958
6068
23577
32156
32709
32087
97
7618
93
16052
14300
11129
6602
14460
25458
15869
27047
26808
7354
27834
11250
552
27058
14808
9642
32253
26081
21184
11748
32676
2425
19455
19889
18177
2492
15086
30632
27549
6911
9937
2467
25831
32236
12987
11714
19283
11542
27928
26637
10035
10748
24429
29701
14997
32235
3C30
190E
1FE4
286B
72B9
2895
60CF
47E0
5677
1211
574A
09F1
1E6A
4EF1
672E
05C6
3B12
601B
02A5
3589
33D9
3A1F
19F3
5A62
70A6
2355
2A28
6442
2D1A
3CAF
3F06
20A8
3841
65BD
5E06
765C
3522
7FA7
3F8B
2367
4C1F
31EA
6AAD
30EF
03B9
3E56
17B4
5C19
7D9C
7FC5
7D57
0061
1DC2
005D
3EB4
37DC
2B79
19CA
387C
6372
3DFD
69A7
68B8
1CBA
6CBA
2BF2
0228
69B2
39D8
25AA
7DFD
65E1
52C0
2DE4
7FA4
0979
4BFF
4DB1
4701
09BC
3AEE
77A8
6B9D
1AFF
26D1
09A3
64E7
7DEC
32BB
2DC2
4B53
2D16
6D18
680D
2733
29FC
5F6D
7405
3A95
7DEB
. . . continued on next page
B-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
1849
8161
29658
10865
8904
15034
18736
26360
30233
19154
6683
12866
9932
23537
31881
14121
24033
20750
10673
6628
9236
25468
28021
21490
23218
15773
27540
9073
24998
20935
1601
31729
24390
24760
24103
26211
22639
24225
8864
19959
15488
13188
29931
9580
1900
16873
6459
9821
24900
31435
30593
6539
5230
8795
27046
9994
17154
28998
3012
10260
28763
31963
31517
3307
5485
17663
28499
8032
15807
2330
21792
28389
16973
32268
17903
23984
17822
22682
25977
7525
8225
30785
1008
28604
20680
30086
1800
17980
20339
10387
25079
31578
9694
12639
23724
32051
21547
1077
21733
13823
0739
1FE1
73DA
2A71
22C8
3ABA
4930
66F8
7619
4AD2
1A1B
3242
26CC
5BF1
7C89
3729
5DE1
510E
29B1
19E4
2414
637C
6D75
53F2
5AB2
3D9D
6B94
2371
61A6
51C7
0641
7BF1
5F46
60B8
5E27
6663
586F
5EA1
22A0
4DF7
3C80
3384
74EB
256C
076C
41E9
193B
265D
6144
7ACB
7781
198B
146E
225B
69A6
270A
4302
7146
0BC4
2814
705B
7CDB
7B1D
0CEB
156D
44FF
6F53
1F60
3DBF
091A
5520
6EE5
424D
7E0C
45EF
5DB0
459E
589A
6579
1D65
2021
7841
03F0
6FBC
50C8
7586
0708
463C
4F73
2893
61F7
7B5A
25DE
315F
5CAC
7D33
542B
0435
54E5
35FF
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23557
17638
3545
9299
6323
19590
7075
14993
19916
6532
17317
16562
26923
9155
20243
32391
20190
27564
20869
9791
714
7498
23278
8358
9468
23731
25133
2470
17501
24671
11930
9154
7388
3440
27666
22888
13194
26710
7266
15175
15891
26692
14757
28757
31342
19435
2437
20573
18781
18948
30766
5985
6823
20973
10197
9618
22705
5234
12541
8019
22568
5221
25216
1354
29335
6682
26128
29390
8852
6110
11847
10239
6955
10897
14076
12450
8954
19709
1252
15142
26958
8759
12696
11936
25635
17231
22298
7330
30758
6933
2810
8820
7831
19584
2944
19854
10456
17036
2343
14820
5C05
44E6
0DD9
2453
18B3
4C86
1BA3
3A91
4DCC
1984
43A5
40B2
692B
23C3
4F13
7E87
4EDE
6BAC
5185
263F
02CA
1D4A
5AEE
20A6
24FC
5CB3
622D
09A6
445D
605F
2E9A
23C2
1CDC
0D70
6C12
5968
338A
6856
1C62
3B47
3E13
6844
39A5
7055
7A6E
4BEB
0985
505D
495D
4A04
782E
1761
1AA7
51ED
27D5
2592
58B1
1472
30FD
1F53
5828
1465
6280
054A
7297
1A1A
6610
72CE
2294
17DE
2E47
27FF
1B2B
2A91
36FC
30A2
22FA
4CFD
04E4
3B26
694E
2237
3198
2EA0
6423
434F
571A
1CA2
7826
1B15
0AFA
2274
1E97
4C80
0B80
4D8E
28D8
428C
0927
39E4
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-7
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
6952
13599
22242
8410
31287
3425
7717
9666
4259
7349
10738
27221
11992
956
26087
20348
22084
10217
28949
27786
8430
4161
14265
13467
9403
10108
17374
16887
9342
4110
23690
17174
15816
13724
18832
28042
4683
17968
10729
3233
16451
13359
1615
26444
26184
23699
8669
5916
18327
20400
528
19710
18507
18327
20298
17005
20444
1179
14175
15599
22617
4431
16999
16565
14287
32574
17857
25907
29100
3556
31111
5189
21328
17470
6264
25451
26323
1784
32150
30538
25033
23345
12630
8042
13014
14926
7489
6091
32551
7919
2668
25730
26132
29940
25734
24622
13030
4982
31887
1647
1B28
351F
56E2
20DA
7A37
0D61
1E25
25C2
10A3
1CB5
29F2
6A55
2ED8
03BC
65E7
4F7C
5644
27E9
7115
6C8A
20EE
1041
37B9
349B
24BB
277C
43DE
41F7
247E
100E
5C8A
4316
3DC8
359C
4990
6D8A
124B
4630
29E9
0CA1
4043
342F
064F
674C
6648
5C93
21DD
171C
4797
4FB0
0210
4CFE
484B
4797
4F4A
426D
4FDC
049B
375F
3CEF
5859
114F
4267
40B5
37CF
7F3E
45C1
6533
71AC
0DE4
7987
1445
5350
443E
1878
636B
66D3
06F8
7D96
774A
61C9
5B31
3156
1F6A
32D6
3A4E
1D41
17CB
7F27
1EEF
0A6C
6482
6614
74F4
6486
602E
32E6
1376
7C8F
066F
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
23393
5619
17052
21292
2868
19538
24294
22895
27652
29905
21415
1210
22396
26552
24829
8663
991
21926
23306
13646
148
24836
24202
9820
12939
2364
14820
2011
13549
28339
25759
11116
31448
27936
3578
12371
12721
10264
25344
13246
544
9914
4601
16234
24475
26318
6224
13381
30013
22195
1756
19068
28716
31958
16097
1308
3320
16682
6388
12828
3518
3494
6458
10717
8463
27337
19846
9388
21201
31422
166
28622
6477
10704
25843
25406
21523
8569
9590
22466
12455
27506
21847
28392
1969
30715
23674
22629
12857
30182
21880
6617
27707
16249
24754
31609
22689
3226
4167
25624
5B61
15F3
429C
532C
0B34
4C52
5EE6
596F
6C04
74D1
53A7
04BA
577C
67B8
60FD
21D7
03DF
55A6
5B0A
354E
0094
6104
5E8A
265C
328B
093C
39E4
07DB
34ED
6EB3
649F
2B6C
7AD8
6D20
0DFA
3053
31B1
2818
6300
33BE
0220
26BA
11F9
3F6A
5F9B
66CE
1850
3445
753D
56B3
06DC
4A7C
702C
7CD6
3EE1
051C
0CF8
412A
18F4
321C
0DBE
0DA6
193A
29DD
210F
6AC9
4D86
24AC
52D1
7ABE
00A6
6FCE
194D
29D0
64F3
633E
5413
2179
2576
57C2
30A7
6B72
5557
6EE8
07B1
77FB
5C7A
5865
3239
75E6
5578
19D9
6C3B
3F79
60B2
7B79
58A1
0C9A
1047
6418
. . . continued on next page
B-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
8709
7476
26
13627
7532
5471
20844
19007
32357
26066
30405
8043
12187
17064
14682
12780
26348
24479
28336
13167
7380
7564
14956
2122
16713
4681
16911
28070
18745
9675
21392
14652
23068
10834
14024
5048
11694
7771
32566
1342
9509
24606
22804
27969
14724
24682
5923
27373
5294
16077
29906
20593
17473
5121
14026
7357
9775
4433
21468
5449
29461
26677
639
22639
15696
18098
7449
24823
20817
24474
12081
16971
31531
8436
4536
6483
14443
12559
10212
17176
26311
6186
6974
31729
4076
8677
27881
7189
16562
32090
17821
5173
6600
15201
16507
1541
10699
15552
12136
31429
2205
1D34
001A
353B
1D6C
155F
516C
4A3F
7E65
65D2
76C5
1F6B
2F9B
42A8
395A
31EC
66EC
5F9F
6EB0
336F
1CD4
1D8C
3A6C
084A
4149
1249
420F
6DA6
4939
25CB
5390
393C
5A1C
2A52
36C8
13B8
2DAE
1E5B
7F36
053E
2525
601E
5914
6D41
3984
606A
1723
6AED
14AE
3ECD
74D2
5071
4441
1401
36CA
1CBD
262F
1151
53DC
1549
7315
6835
027F
586F
3D50
46B2
1D19
60F7
5151
5F9A
2F31
424B
7B2B
20F4
11B8
1953
386B
310F
27E4
4318
66C7
182A
1B3E
7BF1
0FEC
21E5
6CE9
1C15
40B2
7D5A
459D
1435
19C8
3B61
407B
0605
29CB
3CC0
2F68
7AC5
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
30380
15337
10716
13592
2412
15453
13810
12956
30538
10814
18939
19767
20547
29720
31831
26287
11310
25724
21423
5190
258
13978
4670
23496
23986
839
11296
30913
27297
10349
32504
18405
3526
19161
23831
21380
4282
32382
806
6238
10488
19507
27288
2390
19094
13860
9225
2505
27806
2408
10924
23096
22683
10955
17117
15837
22647
10700
30293
5579
11057
30238
14000
22860
27172
307
20380
26427
10702
30024
14018
4297
13938
25288
27294
31835
8228
12745
6746
1456
27743
27443
31045
12225
21482
14678
30656
13721
21831
30208
9995
3248
12030
5688
2082
23143
25906
15902
21084
25723
76AC
3BE9
29DC
3518
096C
3C5D
35F2
329C
774A
2A3E
49FB
4D37
5043
7418
7C57
66AF
2C2E
647C
53AF
1446
0102
369A
123E
5BC8
5DB2
0347
2C20
78C1
6AA1
286D
7EF8
47E5
0DC6
4AD9
5D17
5384
10BA
7E7E
0326
185E
28F8
4C33
6A98
0956
4A96
3624
2409
09C9
6C9E
0968
2AAC
5A38
589B
2ACB
42DD
3DDD
5877
29CC
7655
15CB
2B31
761E
36B0
594C
6A24
0133
4F9C
673B
29CE
7548
36C2
10C9
3672
62C8
6A9E
7C5B
2024
31C9
1A5A
05B0
6C5F
6B33
7945
2FC1
53EA
3956
77C0
3599
5547
7600
270B
0CB0
2EFE
1638
0822
5A67
6532
3E1E
525C
647B
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-9
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14786
18538
17703
112
17993
11411
1467
13846
16958
23649
11049
1320
2204
51
13816
9823
25979
16004
24240
20631
12637
8105
18279
16763
29822
6055
10769
17785
6516
19822
5833
25528
2504
16209
31391
5871
11273
30722
20882
22601
4368
21354
9012
7766
13435
2952
32346
18600
11739
931
2789
31869
5331
5542
15549
8204
3181
19315
7366
11372
738
24130
10559
11099
11015
23041
12901
1248
15644
12124
21959
11577
6697
903
28593
5428
31857
7837
17385
14548
1519
20982
32742
27076
30311
16366
27126
23618
32041
17322
6107
26575
15957
28967
5638
10313
20207
19207
20580
5409
39C2
486A
4527
0070
4649
2C93
05BB
3616
423E
5C61
2B29
0528
089C
0033
35F8
265F
657B
3E84
5EB0
5097
315D
1FA9
4767
417B
747E
17A7
2A11
4579
1974
4D6E
16C9
63B8
09C8
3F51
7A9F
16EF
2C09
7802
5192
5849
1110
536A
2334
1E56
347B
0B88
7E5A
48A8
2DDB
03A3
0AE5
7C7D
14D3
15A6
3CBD
200C
0C6D
4B73
1CC6
2C6C
02E2
5E42
293F
2B5B
2B07
5A01
3265
04E0
3D1C
2F5C
55C7
2D39
1A29
0387
6FB1
1534
7C71
1E9D
43E9
38D4
05EF
51F6
7FE6
69C4
7667
3FEE
69F6
5C42
7D29
43AA
17DB
67CF
3E55
7127
1606
2849
4EEF
4B07
5064
1521
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13347
7885
6669
8187
18145
14109
14231
27606
783
6301
5067
15383
1392
7641
25700
25259
19813
20933
638
16318
6878
1328
14744
22800
25919
4795
18683
32658
1586
27208
17517
599
16253
8685
29972
22128
19871
19405
17972
8599
10142
26834
23710
27280
6570
7400
26374
22218
29654
13043
13427
31084
24023
23931
15836
6085
30324
27561
13821
269
28663
29619
2043
6962
29119
22947
9612
18698
16782
29735
2136
8086
10553
11900
19996
5641
28328
25617
26986
5597
14078
13247
499
30469
17544
28510
23196
13384
4239
20725
6466
28465
19981
16723
4522
678
15320
29116
5388
22845
3423
1ECD
1A0D
1FFB
46E1
371D
3797
6BD6
030F
189D
13CB
3C17
0570
1DD9
6464
62AB
4D65
51C5
027E
3FBE
1ADE
0530
3998
5910
653F
12BB
48FB
7F92
0632
6A48
446D
0257
3F7D
21ED
7514
5670
4D9F
4BCD
4634
2197
279E
68D2
5C9E
6A90
19AA
1CE8
6706
56CA
73D6
32F3
3473
796C
5DD7
5D7B
3DDC
17C5
7674
6BA9
35FD
010D
6FF7
73B3
07FB
1B32
71BF
59A3
258C
490A
418E
7427
0858
1F96
2939
2E7C
4E1C
1609
6EA8
6411
696A
15DD
36FE
33BF
01F3
7705
4488
6F5E
5A9C
3448
108F
50F5
1942
6F31
4E0D
4153
11AA
02A6
3BD8
71BC
150C
593D
. . . continued on next page
B-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
2925
2776
18758
11504
13818
8800
8500
31516
15160
14120
3630
8953
2941
11040
17947
11541
29661
30207
15951
30079
30413
3991
31205
5002
19353
19443
14465
2430
6554
32480
30433
21733
6686
27123
32260
20908
9980
14841
28014
13574
13353
2574
2108
2881
20906
10941
22153
103
14399
16201
11537
10125
21166
30407
21767
5536
14746
17687
16485
6078
31799
30746
14435
15739
14265
12417
24453
28984
18447
8717
6089
31802
15846
12692
9454
12908
18214
29433
16697
19635
28183
20721
8056
10531
14845
24050
9507
25858
5926
13202
30175
16262
14322
5114
11768
27906
32652
13533
6870
21703
0B6D
0AD8
4946
2CF0
35FA
2260
2134
7B1C
3B38
3728
0E2E
22F9
0B7D
2B20
461B
2D15
73DD
75FF
3E4F
757F
76CD
0F97
79E5
138A
4B99
4BF3
3881
097E
199A
7EE0
76E1
54E5
1A1E
69F3
7E04
51AC
26FC
39F9
6D6E
3506
3429
0A0E
083C
0B41
51AA
2ABD
5689
0067
383F
3F49
2D11
278D
52AE
76C7
5507
15A0
399A
4517
4065
17BE
7C37
781A
3863
3D7B
37B9
3081
5F85
7138
480F
220D
17C9
7C3A
3DE6
3194
24EE
326C
4726
72F9
4139
4CB3
6E17
50F1
1F78
2923
39FD
5DF2
2523
6502
1726
3392
75DF
3F86
37F2
13FA
2DF8
6D02
7F8C
34DD
1AD6
54C7
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
24457
17161
21314
28728
22162
26259
22180
2266
10291
26620
19650
14236
11482
25289
12011
13892
17336
10759
26816
31065
8578
24023
16199
22310
30402
16613
13084
3437
1703
22659
26896
1735
16178
19166
665
20227
24447
16771
27209
6050
29088
7601
4905
5915
6169
21303
28096
8905
26997
15047
28430
8660
2659
8803
19690
22169
8511
17393
11336
13576
22820
13344
20107
8013
18835
16793
9818
4673
13609
10054
10988
14744
17930
25452
11334
15451
11362
2993
11012
5806
20180
8932
23878
20760
32764
32325
25993
3268
25180
12149
10193
9128
7843
25474
11356
11226
16268
14491
8366
26009
5F89
4309
5342
7038
5692
6693
56A4
08DA
2833
67FC
4CC2
379C
2CDA
62C9
2EEB
3644
43B8
2A07
68C0
7959
2182
5DD7
3F47
5726
76C2
40E5
331C
0D6D
06A7
5883
6910
06C7
3F32
4ADE
0299
4F03
5F7F
4183
6A49
17A2
71A0
1DB1
1329
171B
1819
5337
6DC0
22C9
6975
3AC7
6F0E
21D4
0A63
2263
4CEA
5699
213F
43F1
2C48
3508
5924
3420
4E8B
1F4D
4993
4199
265A
1241
3529
2746
2AEC
3998
460A
636C
2C46
3C5B
2C62
0BB1
2B04
16AE
4ED4
22E4
5D46
5118
7FFC
7E45
6589
0CC4
625C
2F75
27D1
23A8
1EA3
6382
2C5C
2BDA
3F8C
389B
20AE
6599
. . . continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
B-11
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19355
20428
31950
19686
31762
6495
18834
27061
22020
936
19553
27422
32560
2431
19029
3351
21549
26145
30737
10138
24748
30625
16897
28955
28727
6624
11370
18499
17892
15171
13933
17275
4404
6372
5809
13581
29477
27592
15946
11982
11781
1482
9104
7514
31510
12283
9497
6804
13746
5853
1842
24685
7657
29014
4908
2222
2832
3679
13632
14064
15084
29877
18580
8455
26301
24027
22325
27539
5036
21399
13874
360
29711
13820
20159
12367
28239
10189
12558
26710
7328
31547
14364
12546
25112
19183
32594
7679
27801
22157
16365
9561
8435
23341
9200
27039
19956
27945
3719
6469
4B9B
4FCC
7CCE
4CE6
7C12
195F
4992
69B5
5604
03A8
4C61
6B1E
7F30
097F
4A55
0D17
542D
6621
7811
279A
60AC
77A1
4201
711B
7037
19E0
2C6A
4843
45E4
3B43
366D
437B
1134
18E4
16B1
350D
7325
6BC8
3E4A
2ECE
2E05
05CA
2390
1D5A
7B16
2FFB
2519
1A94
35B2
16DD
0732
606D
1DE9
7156
132C
08AE
0B10
0E5F
3540
36F0
3AEC
74B5
4894
2107
66BD
5DDB
5735
6B93
13AC
5397
3632
0168
740F
35FC
4EBF
304F
6E4F
27CD
310E
6856
1CA0
7B3B
381C
3102
6218
4AEF
7F52
1DFF
6C99
568D
3FED
2559
20F3
5B2D
23F0
699F
4DF4
6D29
0E87
1945
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
17460
17629
10461
21618
11498
193
16140
13419
10864
28935
18765
27644
21564
5142
1211
1203
5199
16945
4883
25040
7119
17826
4931
25705
10726
17363
2746
10952
19313
29756
14297
21290
1909
8994
13295
21590
26468
13636
5207
29493
18992
12567
12075
26658
21077
15595
4921
14051
5956
21202
5164
17126
21566
21845
28149
9400
19459
7190
3101
491
25497
29807
26508
4442
4871
31141
9864
12589
5417
8549
14288
8503
20357
15381
18065
24678
23858
7610
18097
20918
7238
30549
16320
20853
26736
10327
24404
7931
5310
554
27311
6865
7762
15761
12697
24850
15259
24243
30508
13982
4434
44DD
28DD
5472
2CEA
00C1
3F0C
346B
2A70
7107
494D
6BFC
543C
1416
04BB
04B3
144F
4231
1313
61D0
1BCF
45A2
1343
6469
29E6
43D3
0ABA
2AC8
4B71
743C
37D9
532A
0775
2322
33EF
5456
6764
3544
1457
7335
4A30
3117
2F2B
6822
5255
3CEB
1339
36E3
1744
52D2
142C
42E6
543E
5555
6DF5
24B8
4C03
1C16
0C1D
01EB
6399
746F
678C
115A
1307
79A5
2688
312D
1529
2165
37D0
2137
4F85
3C15
4691
6066
5D32
1DBA
46B1
51B6
1C46
7755
3FC0
5175
6870
2857
5F54
1EFB
14BE
022A
6AAF
1AD1
1E52
3D91
3199
6112
3B9B
5EB3
772C
369E
. . . continued on next page
B-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
FEB 2005
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
13–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
19006
11690
5669
21513
11695
19860
3265
10226
6113
529
6013
9636
29870
4263
27985
18539
30279
3646
10370
13997
1112
17257
4A3E
2DAA
1625
5409
2DAF
4D94
0CC1
27F2
17E1
0211
177D
25A4
74AE
10A7
6D51
486B
7647
0E3E
2882
36AD
0458
4369
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
0–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
(Hex.)
11239
30038
30222
13476
2497
31842
24342
25857
27662
24594
16790
25039
24086
21581
21346
28187
23231
18743
11594
7198
105
4534
2BE7
7556
760E
34A4
09C1
7C62
5F16
6501
6C0E
6012
4196
61CF
5E16
544D
5362
6E1B
5ABF
4937
2D4A
1C1E
0069
11B6
B-13
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Notes
B-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix C: FRU Optimization / ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
C-1
C-1
C-1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Usage and Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also mandate Re–Optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
NOTE
Re–Optimization Actions listed for any assembly detailed
in the tables below must be performed anytime an RF
Cable associated with it is replaced.
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test
Matrix
Table C-1 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS Components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumes that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until Full Redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table:
NOTE
Not every procedure required to bring the site back in
service is indicated in Table C-1. It is meant to be used as
a guideline ONLY.
The table assumes that the user is familiar enough with
the BTS Optimization/Acceptance Test Procedure to
understand which Test Equipment Set–ups, Calibrations,
and BTS Site preparation will be required before
performing the table number procedures referenced.
Passive BTS components (such as the Bandpass Filters and 2:1
Combiners) only require a TX Calibration Audit to be performed in lieu
of a Full Path Calibration.
S If the TX Path Calibration Audit fails, the entire RF Path Calibration
will need to be repeated.
S If the RF Path Calibration fails, further troubleshooting is warranted.
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX Signal Flow
Paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
Calibration Audit Command.
When the CIO is replaced, the SCCP Cage remains powered up. The
BBX Cards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their original
slots, and re–downloaded (Code and BLO Data). RX and TX Calibration
Audits should then be performed on the affected Carrier Sectors.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
C-1
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
– continued
through
Table 3-55
D D
Alarm Tests
RFDS
RFDS Cables
Switch Card
LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner
LPA or LPA Trunking Module
LPAC Cable
ETIB or Associated Cables
GLI2
D D
CCD Card
RGD/20–pair Punchblock with RGD
50–pair Punchblock (with RGPS)
CSM/GPS
HSO/HSOX
BBX2/BBX–1X
MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC–1X
CIO
SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)
Table 3-17
Download Code/Data
Table 3-18
Table 3-20 Enable CSM Cards
GPS & HSO Initialization
Table 3-24
/ Verification
Table 3-41 TX Path Calibration
Table 3-42 Download Offsets to BBX
Table 3-43 TX Path Audit
RFDS Path Calibration
Table 3-51
and Offset Data Download
Table 4-5 Spectral Purity TX Mask
Table 4-6 Waveform Quality (Rho)
Table 4-7 Pilot Time Offset
Code Domain Power /
Table 4-8
Noise Floor
Table 4-9 FER Test
Table 3-53
MPC / EMPC
Description
TX Cables
Doc
Table
RX Cables
DRF or TRF
Table C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
10
6 6
table continued next page
C-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
– continued
RFDS
RFDS Cables
Switch Card
LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner
LPA or LPA Trunking Module
LPAC Cable
ETIB or Associated Cables
GLI2
CCD Card
50–pair Punchblock (with RGPS)
RGD/20–pair Punchblock with RGD
HSO/HSOX
CSM/GPS
BBX2/BBX–1X
MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC–1X
SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)
CIO
MPC / EMPC
TX Cables
Description
RX Cables
Doc
Table
DRF or TRF
Table C-1: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
OPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND:
D Required
* Perform if determined necessary for additional fault isolation, repair assurance, or required for site certification.
1. Perform on all carrier & sector TX Paths to the SCCP Cage.
2. Perform on all carrier & sector main and Diversity RX Paths to the SCCP Cage.
3. Perform on all primary & redundant TX Paths of affected carrier. (LPAC replacement affects all carriers.)
4. Perform on affected carrier & sector TX Path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier & sector TX Paths).
5. Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX Path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier RX Paths).
6. Perform on all RF Paths of the affected carrier & sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers).
7. Perform with Redundant BBX for at least one sector on one carrier.
8. Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.
9. Perform only if RGD/RGPS or HSO expansion was installed.
10. Verify performance by performing testing on one sector of each carrier.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
C-3
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
– continued
Notes
C-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output
Appendix Content
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage &andBackground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D-1
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output
Usage and Background
Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all Code Domain
Channel Element Gain Settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF
Output (as measured in dBm at the BTS Antenna Connector) is shown in
the table. The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO)
Values have been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed–up to produce a CDMA
Carrier with only the Pilot Channel (no MCC Cards Forward Link
enabled). Pilot Gain is set to 262.
In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate exactly to the
actual RF Output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm Output Range. This is
the level used to calibrate the BTS.
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm’
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
517
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
–
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
–
–
–
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
–
–
–
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
table continued next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
D-1
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output
– continued
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm’
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
397
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
381
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
–
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
–
–
–
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
–
–
–
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
–
–
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
–
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
–
–
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
–
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
–
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
32.7
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
32.4
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
32.9
31.9
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
32.6
31.6
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
32.2
31.2
D-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix E: CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
Appendix Content
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-2
E-4
E-4
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX Synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLI2s via the Concentration Highway Interface (CHI) Bus. This
programming data determines the Transmit and Receive Transceiver
Operating Frequencies (Channels) for each BBX.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum. There are 10 CDMA Wireline or
Non–wireline Band Channels used in a CDMA System (unique per
Customer Operating System).
Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1851.25 1931.25
CHANNEL
25
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FW00463
E-1
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA Candidate Operating
Channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
Transmit and Receive Frequencies. Center Frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05 * 262 = 1943.10 MHz
S RX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on the Customer CDMA System
Frequency Plan.
Each CDMA Channel requires a 1.77 MHz Frequency Segment. The
actual CDMA Carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz Guard Band
on both sides of the carrier.
Minimum Frequency Separation required between any CDMA Carrier
and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS Carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
25
0019
1931.25
1851.25
50
0032
1932.50
1852.50
75
004B
1933.75
1853.75
100
0064
1935.00
1855.00
125
007D
1936.25
1856.25
150
0096
1937.50
1857.50
175
00AF
1938.75
1858.75
200
00C8
1940.00
1860.00
225
00E1
1941.25
1861.25
250
00FA
1942.50
1862.50
275
0113
1943.75
1863.75
300
012C
1945.00
1865.00
325
0145
1946.25
1866.25
350
015E
1947.50
1867.50
375
0177
1948.75
1868.75
400
0190
1950.00
1870.00
425
01A9
1951.25
1871.25
450
01C2
1952.50
1872.50
table continued next page
E-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
475
01DB
1953.75
1873.75
500
01F4
1955.00
1875.00
525
020D
1956.25
1876.25
550
0226
1957.50
1877.50
575
023F
1958.75
1878.75
600
0258
1960.00
1880.00
625
0271
1961.25
1881.25
650
028A
1962.50
1882.50
675
02A3
1963.75
1883.75
700
02BC
1965.00
1885.00
725
02D5
1966.25
1886.25
750
02EE
1967.50
1887.50
775
0307
1968.75
1888.75
800
0320
1970.00
1890.00
825
0339
1971.25
1891.25
850
0352
1972.50
1892.50
875
036B
1973.75
1893.75
900
0384
1975.00
1895.00
925
039D
1976.25
1896.25
950
03B6
1977.50
1897.50
975
03CF
1978.75
1898.75
1000
03E8
1980.00
1900.00
1025
0401
1981.25
1901.25
1050
041A
1982.50
1902.50
1075
0433
1983.75
1903.75
1100
044C
1985.00
1905.00
1125
0465
1986.25
1906.25
1150
047E
1987.50
1807.50
1175
0497
1988.75
1908.75
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-3
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American Cellular
Telephone Frequency Spectrum. There are 10 CDMA Wireline or
Non–Wireline Band Channels used in a CDMA System (unique per
Customer Operating System).
893.970
848.970
799
891.480
891.510
846.480
846.510
694
689
777
889.980
890.010
844.980
845.010
666
667
644
356
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
739
879.990
880.020
834.990
835.020
333
334
311
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
716
717
870.000
870.030
825.000
825.030
824.040
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ËËË
ËËË
ËËË ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
ËË
1023
869.040
RX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
TX FREQ
(MHz)
991
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA Candidate Operating
Channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
Transmit and Receive Frequencies. Center Frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S Channels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
S Channels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
S RX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
E-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
0001
870.0300
825.0300
25
0019
870.7500
825.7500
50
0032
871.5000
826.5000
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
841.5000
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
table continued next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
E-5
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
NOTE
Channel Numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
1023
03FF
870.0000
825.0000
E-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Appendix Content
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent R7495A Test Equipment Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F-1
F-1
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address
Hewlett Packard HP 8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . .
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-5
F-5
F-7
F-8
F-9
F-10
F-12
F-14
F-15
F-16
F-17
F-18
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8921A with PCS Interface Test Equipment Connections . . . . . . . .
HP 8921A with PCS Interface System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Set–up for HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Set–up for Agilent 8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R3465 GPIB Clock Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Set–up for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8932/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . .
F-19
F-19
F-19
F-22
F-23
F-23
F-24
F-26
F-26
F-27
F-28
F-29
Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Without the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self–alignment (Calibration) . . . .
Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-30
F-30
F-30
F-31
F-33
Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Test Cable Set–up using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)
Calibrating the Test Cable Set–up with the Advantest R3465 . . . . . . .
F-35
F-35
F-40
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Preparation
Purpose
This appendix provides information on pre–testing set–up for the
following Test Equipment Items (not required for the Cybertest Test
Set):
S Agilent E7495A Test Equipment Set–up
S Agilent E4406A Transmitter Test Set
S Agilent E4432B Signal Generator
S Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer
S Advantest R3562 Signal Generator
S Agilent 8935 Analyzer (formerly HP 8935)
S HP 8921 with PCS Interface Analyzer
S Advantest R3465 Analyzer
S Motorola CyberTest
S HP 437 Power Meter
S Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter
S GPIB Adapter
Pre–testing set–up information covered includes verification and setting
GPIB Addresses, Inter–unit Cabling, Connectivity Testing, Pre–test
Control Settings, and Equipment Calibration for items that are not
calibrated with the Calibrate Test Equipment Function of the LMF.
The following procedures cover verification and changing GPIB
Addresses for the various items of CDMA Test Equipment supported by
the LMF.
Agilent R7495A Test Equipment
Set–up
This Test Equipment requires a warm-up period of at least 30 minutes
before BTS Testing or Calibration begins.
Using the Agilent E7495A with the LMF
The Agilent E7495A does not require the use of the 19MHz Frequency
Reference; if connected, it will be ignored. The Even Sec SYNC
Connection is required.
The Agilent E7495A Signal Generator is only calibrated down to –80db.
In order to achieve accurate FER Testing, ensure that the RX Set–up
includes at least 40db of Attenuation. This will ensure the Signal
Generator will output sufficient power to operate in the calibrated range.
Set the IP Address as described in Table F-1.
Table F-1: Set IP Address on Agilent E7495A Test Set
n Step
FEB 2005
Action
Use the System Button > Controls >IPAdmin to set an IP Address on the E7495A as
128.0.0.49, and Netmask to 255.255.255.128.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-1
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Connections
It is recommended that you use a hub with BNC and RJ–45
Connections. Suggested Models: Netgear Model EN104 (4 Port) or
EN108 (8 Port).
IMPORTANT
Do NOT use Model Numbers ending with “TP”; those
have no BNC Connectors.
The LMF connects to the hub, which in turn, connects to the BTS and to
the Agilent E7495A.
Agilent E7495A to Hub – This is an Ethernet Cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45.
LMF to Hub – Use one of the following cables to connect the LMF to
the Hub:
– Ethernet Cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45 – Make sure that the LAN Card is
set for either AUTO or to use RJ–45 only.
– COAX Cable between LAN Card and Hub – Use a “T” on the hub
and connect a cable between the other end of the “T” and the BTS
LAN Connection.
Hub to BTS – Use BNC “T” Connector on the hub. If your hub doesn’t
have BNC Ports, use a BNC to UTP Adapter.
Detecting Test Equipment
Check that no other equipment is connected to the LMF. Agilent
equipment must be connected to the LAN to detect it. Then perform the
procedures described in Table F-2.
Table F-2: Agilent E7495A Test Equipment Detection Procedure
n Step
F-2
Action
Click the Tools Menu.
Choose Options.
Check Agilent E7495A Option in non–GPIB Test Equipment and enter its IP Address.
Click Apply and wait a moment.
Click Dismiss.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Power Sensor Calibration
Table F-3 describes the E7495A Power Sensor Calibration.
Table F-3: E7495A Power Sensor Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Display the Power Meter Screen.
Zero the Power Meter by performing the following actions.
– Make sure you are connected as shown in Figure F-1.
2a
Press the Zero Softkey.
2b
Press the Continue Softkey.
Calibrate the Power Meter by performing the following actions.
3a
Press Ref CF.
3b
Enter the Reference Cal Factor, reading it off the label on the Power Sensor Head.
3c
Press Calibrate.
3d
Connect the Power Sensor.
– Refer to Figure F-2.
3e
Press Continue.
3f
Press Cal Factor.
3g
Enter the Cal Factor from the label on the Power Sensor Head.
– Select a Cal Factor that is within the operating frequency of the Base Station.
Figure F-1: Agilent E7495A Pre–Power Sensor Calibration Connection
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Power REF
50 MHz
Ext Ref
In
Even Second
Sync In
Serial 1
Sensor
Serial 2
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
GPS
Antenna
POWER SENSOR
NOT CONNECTED
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-3
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-2: Agilent E7495A Power Sensor Calibration Connection
POWER SENSOR
CONNECTED
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Power REF
50 MHz
Ext Ref
In
Even Second
Sync In
Serial 1
Sensor
Serial 2
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
GPS
Antenna
Cable Calibration
Follow the directions in the WinLMF Program to calibrate cables.
– Calibrate the Short Test Cable (refer to Figure 3-15 on Page 3-66)
and two 10 dB Pads to get a Base Line and then calibrate the TX
and RX set–up. Since you need at least 40 dB of Loss when doing
the FER Test, the set–up for RX is the same as TX.
ATP Set–up
TX Path Calibration Set–up is shown in Test Equipment Set–up. Refer
to Figure 3-18 on Page 3-69.
F-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
Agilent E4406A Transmitter
Tester GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-3 and perform the procedure in Table F-4 to verify
and, if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB Address.
Figure F-3: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Active Function Area
Softkey Label Display Area
System Key
Bk Sp
Key
Enter
Key
Softkey Buttons
Data Entry Keypad
ti-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftw
Table F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the Instrument Front Panel, press the System Key.
– The Softkey Labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen changes.
Press the Config I/O Softkey Button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The Softkey Labels changes.
– The current instrument GPIB Address will be displayed below the GPIB Address Softkey Label.
If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it.
3a
Press the GPIB Address Softkey Button.
– In the on–screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by the
current GPIB Address.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-5
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
3b
Action
On the Front Panel Data Entry Keypad, enter the Analyzer GPIB Address of 18.
– The GPIB Address Label changes to Enter.
– Characters typed wi the Keypad replaces the current GPIB Address in the Active Function Area.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the Bk Sp Key to delete one character at a time.
3c
Press the Enter Softkey Button or the Keypad Enter Key to set the new GPIB Address.
– The Config I/O Softkey Labels will re–appear.
– The new GPIB Address will be displayed under the GPIB Address Softkey Label.
F-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Agilent E4432B Signal
Generator GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-4 and perform the procedure in Table F-5 to verify
and, if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB Address.
Figure F-4: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Active Entry Area
Softkey Label Display Area
Softkey Buttons
Utility Key
Numeric Keypad
Backspace Key
Table F-5: Verify that and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
n Step
Action
In the MENUS section of the Instrument Front Panel, press the Utility Key.
– The Softkey Labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen changes.
Press the GPIB/RS232 Softkey Button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The Softkey Labels changes.
– The current instrument GPIB Address will be displayed below the GPIB Address Softkey Label.
If the current GPIB Address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address Softkey Button.
– The GPIB Address Label and current GPIB Address changes to boldface.
– In the on–screen Active Entry Area, Address: is displayed followed by the current GPIB Address.
3b
On the Front Panel Numeric Keypad, enter the Signal Generator GPIB Address of 1.
– The GPIB Address Label changes to Enter.
– Characters typed in the Keypad replace the current GPIB Address in the Active Entry Display.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the Backspace Key at the lower right of the Keypad to delete one character at
a time.
3c
Press the Enter Softkey Button to set the new GPIB Address.
– The new GPIB Address will be displayed under the GPIB Address Softkey Label.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-7
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Advantest R3267 Spectrum
Analyzer GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-5 and perform the procedure in Table F-6 to verify
and, if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB
Address.
Figure F-5: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Softkey Label Display Area
Softkey Buttons
REMOTE LED
on
LCL Key
CONFIG Key
Keypad
BS Key
ENTR Key
Table F-6: Verify that and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
n Step
Action
If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL Key.
– The LED extinguishes.
Press the CONFIG Key.
– CONFIG Softkey Labels will appear in the Softkey Label display area of the instrument
display.
– The current GPIB Address will be displayed below the GPIB Address Softkey Label.
If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address Softkey.
– A GPIB Address Entry window will open in the instrument display showing the current
GPIB Address.
table continued on next page
F-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-6: Verify that and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
n Step
3b
Action
Enter 18 on the Keypad in the ENTRY Section of the Instrument Front Panel.
– Characters typed on the Keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address
Entry Window.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the BS (Backspace) Key at the lower right of the Keypad to delete one
character at a time.
3c
Press the ENTR Key to the lower right of the Keypad to set the new GPIB Address.
– The GPIB Address Entry window closes.
– The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address Softkey Label.
Advantest R3562 Signal
Generator GPIB Address
Set the GP–IP ADDRESS Switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562
Signal Generator to Address 1 as shown in Figure F-6.
Figure F-6: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting
GPIB Address set to “1”
GP–IP ADDRESS
5 4 3 2 1
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-9
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Agilent 8935 Series E6380
(formerly HP 8935) Test Set
GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-7 and perform the procedure in Table F-7 to verify
and, if necessary, change the Agilent 8935 GPIB Address.
Figure F-7: Agilent 8935 Test Set
Preset
Local
Inst Config
Shift
Cursor Control
FW00885
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–up
and ready for testing.
Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
The HP I/O Configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or no device on the GPIB will be
accessible.
– Consult Test Equipment OEM Documentation for additional information as required.
To verify that the GPIB Addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the Agilent 8935.
– The current HP–IB Address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it:
2a
Press Shift and Inst Config.
2b
Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to the HP–IB Adrs Field.
table continued on next page
F-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
Action
2c
Press the Cursor Control Knob to select the field.
2d
Turn the Cursor Control Knob as required to change the address to 18.
2e
Press the Cursor Control Knob to set the address.
Press Preset to return to normal operation.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-11
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Hewlett Packard HP 8921A and
HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-8 and perform the procedure in Table F-8 to verify
and, if necessary, change the HP 8921A HP 83236A GPIB Addresses.
Figure F-8: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/B
Local
Preset
Cursor Control
Shift
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–up
and ready for testing.
Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses Procedure
n Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB Addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP 8921A.
– The current HP–IB Address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current HP–IB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it.
2a
Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.
2b
Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the
field.
table continued on next page
F-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses Procedure
n Step
Action
2c
Turn the Cursor Control Knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.
2d
Turn the Cursor Control Knob to change the HP–IB Address to 18 and press the knob to set the
address.
2e
Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.
To set the HP 83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB Address = 19, set the DIP Switches as follows:
– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-13
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Advantest R3465
Communications Test Set GPIB
Address
Refer to Figure F-9 and perform the procedure in Table F-9 to verify
and, if necessary, change the GPIB Address for the Advantest R3465.
Figure F-9: R3465 Communications Test Set
GPIB and others
REF UNLOCK
EVEN
SEC/SYNC IN
CDMA
TIME BASE IN
POWER
BNC
“T”
OFF
ON
Vernier
Knob
LCL
Shift
Preset
REF FW00337
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–up
and ready for testing.
Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
F-14
Action
To verify that the GPIB Address is set correctly, perform the following:
1a
Press SHIFT then PRESET.
1b
Press LCL.
1c
Press the GPIB and Others CRT Menu Key to view the current address.
If the current GPIB Address is not set to 18, perform the following actions to change it.
2a
Turn the Vernier Knob as required to select 18.
2b
Press the Vernier Knob to set the address.
To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Motorola CyberTest GPIB
Address
Perform the procedure in Table F-10 to verify and, if necessary, change
the GPIB Address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB
Address requires the following items:
Motorola CyberTest Communications Analyzer.
Computer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95 (or later).
Motorola CyberTAME Software Program named “TAME”.
Parallel Printer Port Cable (shipped with the CyberTest unit).
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–up
and ready for testing.
Table F-10: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
Action
On the LMF Desktop, locate the CyberTAME Icon.
Double–click on the CyberTAME Icon to run the CyberTAME Application.
In the CyberTAME Window Taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.
– The CyberTAME Software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB Address.
– It then will open the IEEE 488.2 Dialog Box.
If the current GPIB Address is not 18, perform the following actions to change it.
4a
Set the GPIB Address to 18.
– Use the UP and DOWN Increment Arrows.
or
– Double–click in the field and type the number.
4b
Click on the OK Button.
– The new address will be written to the CyberTest through the Parallel Port and saved.
Verify that the address has been set by repeating Steps 3 and 4.
– The new address should now appear in the IEEE 488.2 Dialog Box Address Field.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-15
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
HP 437 Power Meter GPIB
Address
Refer to Figure F-10 and follow the steps in Table F-11 to verify and, if
necessary, change the HP 437 GPIB Address.
Figure F-10: HP 437 Power Meter
Preset
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
Enter
REF FW00308
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–up
and ready for testing.
Table F-11: Verify and/or Change the HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address Procedure
n Step
Action
Press Shift and PRESET.
Use the y (UP) Arrow Key to navigate to the HP–IB ADRS and press ENTER.
– The HP–IB Address is displayed.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
F-16
If the current GPIB Address is not set to 13, perform the following actions to change it.
3a
Use the y (UP) and b (DOWN) Arrow Keys to change the HP–IB ADRS to 13.
3b
Press ENTER to set the new address.
Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Gigatronics 8541C Power
Meter GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-11 and follow the steps in Table F-12 to verify and, if
necessary, change the Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address.
Figure F-11: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail
MENU
ENTER
ARROW
KEYS
REF FW00564
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the Test Equipment is set–up
and ready for testing.
Table F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the Power Meter Sensor Cable with AC Power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the Sensing Element or miscalibration.
Press MENU.
Use the b Arrow Key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.
Use the b Arrow Key to select GPIB and press ENTER.
The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.
If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:
Use the a ’ Arrow Keys as required to select MODE.
Use the by Arrow Keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.
If the GPIB Address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
Use the ’ Arrow Key to select ADDRESS.
Use the by Arrow Keys as required to set the GPIB Address to 13.
FEB 2005
Press ENTER to return to normal operation.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-17
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter
Ensure that the RS–232 GPIB Interface adapter DIP Switches are set as
shown in Figure F-12.
Figure F-12: RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
F-18
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
Inter–Unit Connection, Testing,
and Control Settings
The following illustrations, tables, and procedures provide the
information necessary to prepare various items of CDMA Test
Equipment supported by the LMF for BTS Calibration and/or
Acceptance Testing.
HP 8921A with PCS Interface
Test Equipment Connections
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A Test
Equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All Test Equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB Bus.
The LMF expects each piece of Test Equipment to have a factory-set
GPIB Address (refer to Table F-8 and Figure F-8). If there is a
communications problem between the LMF and any piece of Test
Equipment, verify that the GPIB Addresses have been set correctly and
that the GPIB Cables are firmly connected to the Test Equipment.
Figure F-13 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference.
Table F-13: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections
without Rubidium Reference
From Test Set:
8921A
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
CW RF OUT
CW RF IN
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF IN
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
IQ RF IN
IQ RF OUT
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
DET OUT
AUX DSP IN
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
CONTROL I/O
CONTROL I/O
45–pin Custom BUS
10 MHZ OUT
SYNTH REF IN
BNC–Male – BNC–Male
HPIB INTERFACE
10 MHZ OUT
FEB 2005
HPIB INTERFACE
HPIB Cable
REF IN
BNC–Male – BNC–Male
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Connector Type
83236A PCS
F-19
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Figure F-13: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference
HP 83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP 8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP 83236A PCS
INTERFACE
HP–IB
REF IN
FW00368
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
Table F-14: HP 8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections
with Rubidium Reference
From Test Set:
8921A
To Interface:
83203B CDMA
Connector Type
83236A PCS
CW RF OUT
CW RF IN
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
114.3 MHZ IF OUT
114.3 MHZ IF IN
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
IQ RF IN
IQ RF OUT
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
DET OUT
AUX DSP IN
SMC–Female – SMC–Female
CONTROL I/O
CONTROL I/O
45–pin custom BUS
10 MHZ OUT
REF IN
BNC–Male – BNC–Male
HPIB INTERFACE
HPIB INTERFACE
HPIB Cable
10 MHZ INPUT
F-20
10 MHZ OUT
BNC–Male – BNC–Male
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Figure F-14 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference.
Figure F-14: HP 8921A/600 Cable Connections for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference
10 MHZ WITH
RUBIDIUM STANDARD
HP 83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
HP 8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP 83236A PCS
INTERFACE
REF IN
HP–IB
FW00369
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-21
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
HP 8921A with PCS Interface
System Connectivity Test
Perform the procedure in Table F-15 to verify that the connections
between the PCS Interface and the HP 8921A are correct and cables are
intact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of each
instrument.
NOTE
Disconnect other GPIB Devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
Table F-15: System Connectivity Test Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure only after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert the HP 83236A Manual Control/System Card into the Memory Card Slot.
Press the [PRESET] Pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] Pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu Screen.
Position the cursor on Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the Cursor Control
Knob.
In the Choices Selection Box, select Card.
Position the cursor on Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the Cursor Control
Knob.
In the Choices Selection Box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor on RUN TEST and select it.
– The software will provide operator prompts through completion of the Connectivity Set–up.
Perform the following action when the test is complete.
– Position cursor on STOP TEST and select it.
OR
– Press the [K5] Pushbutton.
F-22
10
To return to the Main Menu, press the [K5] Pushbutton.
11
Press the [PRESET] Pushbutton.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Pretest Set–up for HP 8921A
Before the HP 8921A CDMA Analyzer is used for LMF–controlled
testing, it must be set–up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-16: Pretest Set–up for HP 8921A
n Step
Action
Unplug the Memory Card if it is plugged in.
Press the CURSOR CONTROL Knob.
Position the cursor on IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
Pretest Set–up for Agilent 8935
Before the Agilent 8935 Analyzer is used for LMF–controlled testing, it
must be set–up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-17: Pretest Set–up for Agilent 8935
n Step
Action
Unplug the Memory Card if it is plugged in.
Press the Shift Button and then press the I/O Config Button.
Press the Push to Select Knob.
Position the cursor on IO CONFIG and select it.
Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-23
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Advantest R3465 Connection
The following diagram depicts the Rear Panel of the Advantest R3465
Test Equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All Test
Equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB Bus. The
LMF expects each piece of Test Equipment to have a factory-set GPIB
Address. Refer to Table F-9 and Figure F-9.
If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece of
Test Equipment, verify that the GPIB Addresses have been set correctly
and that the GPIB Cables are firmly connected to the Test Equipment.
Figure F-15 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference.
Figure F-15: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
10 MHZ OUT
AC POWER
SERIAL I/O
R3465
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00370
GPIB
CONNECTOR
F-24
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Figure F-16 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference.
Figure F-16: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference
FROM 10 MHZ
RUBIDIUM REFERENCE
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT
R3561L
REAR PANEL
SYN REF IN
LOCAL IN
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
PARALLEL
10 MHZ OUT
AC POWER
SERIAL I/O
R3465/3463
REAR PANEL
GATE IN EXT TRIGGER
AC POWER
GPIB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10 MHZ REF
IF OUT
421 MHZ
FW00371
GPIB
CONNECTOR
FEB 2005
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-25
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
R3465 GPIB Clock Set–up
Table F-18 describes the steps to set the clock for the Advantest R3465
Equipment.
Table F-18: Advantest R3465 Clock Set–up Procedure
n Step
Action
Observe the current date and time displayed in upper right of the CRT Display.
If the date and time are incorrect, perform the following to change them:
2a
Push the Date/Time CRT Menu Key.
2b
Rotate the Vernier Knob to select and set.
2c
Push the Vernier Knob to enter.
2d
Press the SHIFT Button, then press the PRESET Button (just below the CRT Display).
Pretest Set–up for Advantest
R3465
Before the Advantest R3465 Analyzer is used for LMF–controlled
testing, it must be set–up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-19: Pretest Set–up for Advantest R346
n Step
F-26
Action
Press the SHIFT Button so the LED next to it is illuminated.
Press the RESET Button.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Agilent 8932/E4432B Test
Equipment Interconnection
To perform FER Testing on a 1X BTS with the Agilent 8935, a
1X–capable Signal Generator, such as the Agilent E4432B, must be used
in conjunction with the CDMA Base Station Test Set. For proper
operation, the Test Equipment Items must be interconnected as follows.
10 MHz Reference Signal
Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable from the 8935 10 MHz REF
OUT Connector to the E4432B 10MHz IN Connector as shown in
Figure F-17.
Even Second Pulse Reference
Refer to Figure F-17, and connect a BNC “T” Connector to the 8935
EVEN SEC SYNC IN Connector.
– Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable from one side of the BNC
“T” to the E4432B PATTERN TRIG IN Connector.
– Connect the other side of the BNC “T” to the CSM Card SYNC
MONITOR Connector using a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable..
Figure F-17: Agilent 8935/E4432B 10MHz Reference and Even Second Clock Connections
E4432B
PATTERN TRIG IN
E4432B
10 MHz IN
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
8935
EVEN SECOND
SYNC IN
WITH BNC “T”
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
TO GPIB
8935
10 MHz
REF OUT
TO CSM BOARD
SYNCH MONITOR
(EVEN SEC TICK)
TDME0011–1
F-27
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test
Equipment Interconnection
To provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,
the 10 MHz Reference Signal from the E4406A Transmitter Test Set
must be provided to the E4432B Signal Generator.
– Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable from the E4406A 10 MHz
OUT (SWITCHED) Connector to the E4432B 10MHz IN
Connector as shown in Figure F-18.
Figure F-18: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections
E4432B
10 MHz IN
TO GPIB BOX
E4406A
10 MHz OUT
(SWITCHED)
TDME0009–1
F-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Test Equipment Inter–Unit Connection, Testing, and Control
– continued
Advantest R3267/R3562 Test
Equipment Interconnection
To provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,
the R3257 Spectrum Analyzer must be interconnected with the R3562
Signal Generator as follows:
10 MHz Reference Signal
Connect a BNC (M)–BNC (M) Cable between the R3562 SYNTHE
REF IN Connector and the R3267 10 MHz OUT Connector as shown
in Figure F-19..
Serial I/O
Using the AdvanTest Cable provided, connect the R3267 SERIAL I/O
Connector to the R3562 SERIAL I/O Connector as shown in
Figure F-19..
Figure F-19: Advantest 10 MHz Reference and Serial I/O Connections
R3267
10 MHZ OUT
R3267
SERIAL I/O
TO GPIB BOX
R3562
SYNTHE REF IN
TO GPIB
BOX
R3562
SERIAL I/O
TDME0010–1
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-29
Equipment Calibration
Calibration Without the LMF
Several Test Equipment Items used in the Optimization Process require
Pre–Calibration actions or Calibration Verification that are not supported
by the LMF. Procedures to perform these activities for the applicable
Test Equipment Items are covered in this section.
Agilent E4406A Transmitter
Tester Self–alignment
(Calibration)
Figure F-20: Performing Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration)
Softkey Label Display Area
System Key
Softkey Buttons
Refer to Figure F-20 and perform the procedure in Table F-20 to perform
the Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration).
Table F-20: Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration) Procedure
n Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the Instrument Front Panel, press the System Key.
– The Softkey Labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen changes.
Press the Alignments Softkey Button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The Softkey Labels changes.
Press the Align All Now Softkey Button.
– All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.
– The display changes to show progress and results of the alignments performed.
– The alignment will take less than one minute.
F-30
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Equipment Calibration
– continued
Calibrating HP 437 Power
Meter
Precise Transmit Output Power Calibration Measurements are made
using a Bolometer–type Broadband Power Meter with a sensitive Power
Sensor. Perform the procedure in Table F-21 to enter information unique
to the Power Sensor before calibrating the Test Set–up. Refer to
Figure F-21 as required.
NOTE
This procedure must be done before the Automated
Calibration to enter Power Sensor–specific Calibration
Values.
Figure F-21: Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
TO POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.
POWER REFERENCE IS
ENABLED USING THE SHIFT ’
KEYS
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
CONNECT POWER
SENSOR WITH POWER
METER TURNED OFF
FW00308
Table F-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the Power Meter Sensor Cable with AC Power applied to the meter.
– Disconnection could result in destruction of the Sensing Element or mis–calibration.
Make sure the Power Meter AC LINE Pushbutton is OFF.
Connect the Power Sensor Cable to the SENSOR Input.
Set the AC LINE Pushbutton to ON.
* IMPORTANT
The Calibration should be performed only after the Power Meter and Sensor have been allowed to
warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-31
Equipment Calibration
– continued
Table F-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Perform the following actions to set or verify that the correct Power Sensor Model:
4a
Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.
4b
Identify the Power Sensor Model Number from the Sensor Label.
4c
Use the [y] or [b] Button to select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].
Ensure that the Power Reference Output is OFF.
– Refer to the illustration for Step 9.
Observe the instrument display to determine if the triangular indicator over PWR REF is
displayed.
S If the triangular indicator is not displayed, proceed to Step 7.
S If the triangular indicator is displayed:
– Proceed to Step 8.
– Press [SHIFT] then [’] to turn it off.
Press [ZERO] .
– The display will show “Zeroing ******.”
– Wait for the process to complete.
Connect the Power Sensor to the POWER REF Output.
Turn on the PWR REF by performing the following actions.
9a
Press [SHIFT] then [’].
9b
Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above PWR REF.
10
Perform the following actions to set the REF CF%.
10a
Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO] ) for CAL.
10b
Enter the Sensor’s REF CF% from the Sensor’s Decal using the Arrow Keys and press [ENTER].
– The Power Meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.
NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the Power Sensor, assume it to be 100%.
table continued on next page
F-32
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Equipment Calibration
– continued
Table F-21: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
11
Perform the following actions to set the CAL FAC %:
11a
Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.
11b
On the Sensor’s Decal, locate an approximate Calibration Percentage Factor (CF%) at 2 GHz.
11c
Enter the Sensor’s Calibration % (CF%) using the Arrow Keys and press [ENTER].
– When complete, the Power Meter will typically display 0.05 dBm; any reading between 0.00
and 0.10 is normal.
12
To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following actions.
12a
Press [SHIFT] then [’].
12b
Disconnect the Power Sensor from the POWER REF Output.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-33
Equipment Calibration
– continued
Calibrating the Gigatronics
8541C Power Meter
Precise transmit Output Power Calibration measurements are made using
a Bolometer–type Broadband Power Meter with a sensitive Power
Sensor. Perform the procedure in Table F-22 to enter information unique
to the Power Sensor.
Table F-22: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the Power Meter Sensor Cable while AC Power is applied to the meter.
– Disconnection could result in destruction of the Sensing Element or miscalibration.
Make sure the Power Meter POWER Pushbutton is OFF.
Connect the Power Sensor Cable to the SENSOR Input.
Set the POWER Pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
Allow the Power Meter and sensor to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before
performing the Calibration Procedure.
Connect the Power Sensor to the CALIBRATOR Output Connector.
Press ZERO.
– Wait for the process to complete.
– Sensor Factory Calibration Data is read to Power Meter during this process.
When the Zeroing Process is complete, disconnect the Power Sensor from the CALIBRATOR
Output.
Figure F-22: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO
CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
WITH POWER METER
TURNED OFF
AC POWER
FRONT View
GPIB CONNECTION
REAR View
FW00564
F-34
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Manual Cable Calibration
Calibrating the Test Cable
Set–up using HP PCS Interface
(HP83236)
Table F-23 covers the procedure to calibrate the Test Equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
NOTE
This calibration method must be executed with great care.
Some Losses are measured close to the minimum limit of
the Power Meter Sensor (–30dBm).
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S Test Equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for
Cable Calibration.
S Test Equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB Controller is turned off.
Insert the HP83236 Manual Control System Card into the Memory Card Slot.
Press the Preset Pushbutton.
Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS Pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) Screen.
Position the cursor on Select Procedure Location and select it.
In the Choices Selection Box, select CARD.
Position the cursor on Select Procedure Filename and select it.
In the Choices Selection Box, select MANUAL.
Position the cursor on RUN TEST and select it.
– The HP Analyzer must be in Control Mode.
Select YES.
Proceed based upon the analyzer being used.
S If the HP83236A is being used, proceed to Step 9.
S If the HP83236B is being used, proceed to Step 10.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-35
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Table F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Set the Channel Number= by performing the following actions.
9a
Position the cursor on Channel Number and select it.
9b
Enter the chan# using the Numeric Keypad.
9c
Press [Enter].
– The screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the Channel Number Line.
9d
Proceed to Step 11.
10
Set the Channel Frequency by performing the following actions.
10a
Position the cursor on Frequency Band and press Enter.
10b
Select User Defined Frequency.
10c
Go Back to Previous Menu.
10d
Position the cursor to 83236 Generator Frequency and enter actual RX Frequency.
10e
Position the cursor to 83236 Analyzer Frequency and enter actual TX Frequency.
11
Set the RF Generator Level by performing the following actions.
11a
Position the cursor on RF Generator Level and select it.
11b
Enter –10 using the Numeric Keypad.
11c
Press [Enter].
– The screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level
Line.
12
Set the user–fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm by performing the following actions.
12a
Position the cursor on Analyzer Attenuation and select it
12b
Position the cursor on User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
12c
Enter 0 (zero) using the Numeric Keypad and press [Enter].
13
Select Back to Previous Menu.
14
Record the Generator Frequency Level .
S If using the HP83226A, proceed to Step 15.
S If using the HP83226B, proceed to Step 16.
table continued on next page
F-36
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Table F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
15
HP83226A: Perform the following actions.
15a
Position the cursor on Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
15b
Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
15c
Position the cursor on Prev Menu and select it.
15d
Proceed to Step 17.
16
HP83226B: Perform the following actions.
16a
Position the cursor on Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
16b
Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 –
1910 MHz).
16c
Position the cursor on Prev Menu and select it.
17
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
18
Connect the Power Sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY Port of the PCS Interface.
19
On the HP 8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
20
Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude Value.
21
Increase the Amplitude Value until the Power Meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude Value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the
Amplitude by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
22
Disconnect the Power Sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
NOTE
The Power Meter Sensor’s lower limit is –30dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method.
For further accuracy, always re-zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to
the component being calibrated.
– After connecting the Power Sensor to the component, record the calibrated Loss
immediately.
23
Disconnect all components in the Test Set–up in order to calibrate each component separately.
23a
Connect each component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the Power Sensor.
23b
Record the calibrated Loss Value displayed on the Power Meter.
S Example:
24
(A) Test Cable(s)
(B) 20dB Attenuator
(B) Directional Coupler =
–1.4 dB
–20.1 dB
–29.8 dB
After all components have been calibrated, re–assemble all of the components back together.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-37
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Table F-23: Test Cable Set–up (using the HP PCS Interface) Calibration Procedure
n Step
25
Action
Calculate the Total Test Set–up Loss Value by adding up all the individual Loss Values:
S Example:
Total Test Set–up Loss Value = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
– This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
26
Under Screen Controls press the TESTS Button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) Screen.
27
Select Continue (K2).
28
Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
29
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
30
Verify the GPIB (HP–IB) Address (HP 8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA
Interface).
– Fields not specifically identified remain at default values.
30a
Under To Screen, select More.
30b
Select IO CONFIG.
30c
Set HP–IB Adrs to 18.
30d
Set Mode to Talk&Lstn.
31
Verify that the HP 8921A is displaying Frequency instead of RF Channel.
31a
Press the blue [SHIFT] Button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] Button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) Screen.
31b
Use the Cursor Control to set RF Display to Freq.
32
Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the Test Cable Insertion Loss Values into the LMF.
F-38
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Figure F-23: Cable Calibration using HP8921 with PCS Interface
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
(B)
20dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
50 Ω
TERMINATOR
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
FEB 2005
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FW00292
F-39
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Calibrating the Test Cable
Set–up with the Advantest
R3465
IMPORTANT
Ensure that the GPIB Interface is OFF for the duration of
this procedure.
Advantest R3465 Manual Test Set–up and Calibration must be
performed on both the TX and RX Frequencies.
Table F-24: Test Cable Set–up (using Advantest R3465) Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure can only be performed after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET Keys located below the display.
Press the ADVANCE Key in the MEASUREMENT area of the Control Panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT Menu Key.
Select the Set–up CRT Menu Key.
Use the Vernier Knob and the Cursor Keys to set the following parameters.
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default values.
Select the Return CRT Menu Key.
Press FREQ Key in the ENTRY Area.
Set the Frequency to the desired value by using the Keypad Entry Keys.
Verify that the Mod CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF.
S If it is highlighting OFF, proceed to Step 10.
S If it is not highlighting OFF:
– Press the Mod Key to toggle it OFF.
– Proceed to Step 10.
table continued on next page
F-40
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Table F-24: Test Cable Set–up (using Advantest R3465) Calibration Procedure
n Step
10
Action
Verify that the Output CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF.
S If it is highlighting OFF, proceed to Step 11.
S If it is not highlighting OFF:
– Press the Output Key to toggle it OFF.
– Proceed to Step 11.
11
Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the Keypad Entry Keys.
13
Zero the Power Meter.
14
Connect the Power Sensor directly to the “RF OUT” Port on the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit.
15
Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle Output to ON.
16
Record the Power Meter Reading ________________________
17
Disconnect the Power Meter Sensor from the R3561L RF OUT Jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter Sensor’s lower limit is –30dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method.
For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to
the component being calibrated.
– Then, after connecting the Power Sensor to the component, record the calibrated Loss
immediately.
18
Disconnect all components in the the Test Set–up in order to calibrate each one separately.
18a
Connect each component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” Port and the Power Sensor.
– Refer to Figure F-24, “Set–ups A, B, and C”.
18b
Record the calibrated Loss Value displayed on the Power Meter for each connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= –1.4 dB
(C) 20dB Attenuator
= –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB
19
Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle Output OFF.
20
Calculate the total Test Set–up loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total Test Set–up loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
21
Press the FREQ Key in the ENTRY Area.
22
Using the Keypad Entry Keys, set the test frequency to the RX Frequency.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
F-41
Manual Cable Calibration
– continued
Table F-24: Test Cable Set–up (using Advantest R3465) Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
23
Repeat Steps 9 through 19 for the RX Frequency.
24
Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the Test Cable Insertion Loss Values into the LMF.
Figure F-24: Cable Calibration using the Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
50 Ω
TERMINATOR
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-42
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FW00320
FEB 2005
Appendix G: Downloading ROM Code
Appendix Content
Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Procedure – Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
G-1
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Downloading ROM Code
Exception Procedure –
Downloading ROM Code
This procedure is not part of a normal Optimization.
Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternative
exists to load a BTS Device with the correct version of ROM Code.
NOTE
One GLI must be INS_ACTIVE (bright green) before
ROM Code can be downloaded to non–GLI Devices.
CAUTION
The correct ROM and RAM Codes for the Software
Release used on the BSS must be loaded into BTS
Devices. To identify the correct device ROM and RAM
Code Loads for the Software Release being used on the
BSS, refer to the Version Matrix section of the SCt
CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or
CD–ROMs containing the BSS Software).
All devices in a BTS must be loaded with the ROM and
RAM Code specified for the Software Release used on the
BSS before any Optimization or Acceptance Test
Procedures can be performed.
If a replacement device is loaded with ROM Code that is
not compatible with the BSS Software Release being used,
the Device ROM Code can be changed using the LMF
before performing the BTS Optimization and ATPs. A
device loaded with later release ROM Code can not be
converted back to a previous release ROM Code in the
field without Motorola assistance.
If it is necessary to download ROM Code to a device from the LMF, the
procedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM Code
download using the LMF.
Prerequisites
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAM
Code Files exist in the LMF Computer’s applicable :\\cdma\loads\\code Folder for each of the
devices to be loaded.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
G-1
Downloading ROM Code
– continued
CAUTION
The Release Level of the ROM Code to be downloaded
must be the one specified for the Software Release
installed in the BSS. The Release Level of the ROM Code
resident in the other devices in the BTS must also be
correct for the BSS Software Release being used.
ROM Code must not be downloaded to a frame loaded
with code for a BSS Software Release with which it is not
compatible.
This procedure should only be used to upgrade
replacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to
upgrade all devices in a BTS.
If a BTS is to be upgraded from R15.x to R16.0, etc., the
upgrade should be done by the OMC–R using the
DownLoad Manager.
Table G-1: ROM and RAM Code Download to Devices Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on the device to be loaded.
NOTE
More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each
one to be downloaded or from the BTS Menu Bar Select Pull–down Menu, select the device item
that applies.
Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)
From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menu, select Status.
– A Status Report Window will appear.
Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
NOTE
“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four
digits in the filename of a device’s Binary ROM Code File.
– By using this part of the filename, the ROM Code File can be matched to the device in which
it is to be loaded.
Click OK to close the Status Window.
Click on the device to be loaded.
NOTE
ROM Code is automatically selected for download from the :\\version folder>\ specified by the NextLoad property
in the bts–#.CDF File.
To check the value of the NextLoad Property, click on Util > Examine > Display NextLoad.
– A Pop–up Message will show the value of the NextLoad.
table continued on next page
G-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Downloading ROM Code
– continued
Table G-1: ROM and RAM Code Download to Devices Procedure
n Step
Action
From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menus, select Download > ROM.
S If the file matching the Hardware Binary Type of the device is found in the Code Folder, a
Status Report shows the result of the download.
– Proceed to Step 11.
S If a file selection Window appears, select the ROM Code File manually.
– Proceed to Step 7.
Double–click on the Version Folder with the desired Version Number for the ROM Code File (for
example: 2.16.0.x).
Double–click the Code Folder.
– A list of ROM and RAM Code Files will be displayed.
! CAUTION
A ROM Code File with the correct HW Bin Type must be chosen. Using a file with the wrong
HW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.
Click on the ROM Code File with the filename that matches the device type and HW Bin Type
number noted in Step 3 (for example, file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM Code File for a BBX
with a HW Bin Type of 0604).
– The file should be highlighted.
10
Click on the Load Button.
– A Status Report Window is displayed showing the result of the download.
NOTE
If the ROM Load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device,
perform Steps 6 through 10 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.
11
Click OK to close the Status Window.
12
From the LMF Window Menu Bar Tools Pull–down Menus, select Update NextLoad > CDMA.
13
In the left–hand pane of the window that opens, click on the BTS Number for the frame being
loaded (for example, BTS–14).
14
On the list of versions displayed in the right–hand pane, click the Button next to the Version
Number of the folder that was used for the ROM Code download (for example, 2.16.0.x) and click
Save.
– A Pop–up Message will appear showing the CDF has been updated.
15
Click on the OK Button to dismiss the Pop–up Message.
16
Click on the device that was loaded with ROM Code.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
G-3
Downloading ROM Code
– continued
Table G-1: ROM and RAM Code Download to Devices Procedure
n Step
17
Action
NOTE
RAM Code is automatically selected for download.
From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menus, select Download > Code/Data to download
RAM Code and DDS File Data.
– A Status Report is displayed showing the result of the download.
18
Click OK to close the Status Window.
19
Observe the downloaded non–GLI Device to ensure it is OOS_RAM (yellow).
20
Click on the device that was loaded with code.
21
From the BTS Menu Bar Device Pull–down Menu, select Status.
Verify that the correct ROM and RAM Version Numbers are displayed in the Status Report
Window.
22
Click OK to close the Status Window.
G-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix H: In–Service Calibration
Appendix Content
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment STabilization and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1X Test Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
H-1
H-1
H-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
H-3
H-3
H-6
H-9
H-12
H-14
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-19
H-19
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Introduction
Purpose
This procedure is a guide to performing Calibration of new BTS
expansion carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure
also supports BTS Recalibration following replacement of RF Chain
components while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends performing this procedure during a Maintenance
Window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 2–to–1 Combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one carrier of the BTS at a
time. That is, LPA Modules 1A, 1B, 1C, and 1D can be calibrated while
LPA Modules 3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D remain in service and vice versa.
Equipment STabilization and
Calibration
NOTE
Calibration of the Communications Test Set (or equivalent
Test Equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall Test Equipment Set.
Calibrate the Test Equipment after it has been allowed to
warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
CAUTION
If any component of the Test Equipment Set (for example,
a Test Cable, RF Adapter, Signal Generator) has been
replaced, the Test Equipment Set must be recalibrated.
Failure to do so could introduce Measurement Errors that
ultimately result in degradation of system performance.
1X Test Equipment
Requirements
In–Service Calibration (ISC) of 1X carrier functions requires using the
following Test Equipment for the purposes indicated:
S An Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer to perform TX Calibration.
S An Advantest R3562 Signal Generator for R3267 Delta Power
Calibration.
S An Agilent E4406A Transmitter Test Set to perform TX Calibration
S An Agilent E4432A Signal Generator for E4406A Delta Power
Calibration.
S An Agilent 8935 Series E6380A equipped with Option 200 (if
purchased new) or option R2K (if retrofitted) to perform TX
Calibration.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-1
Introduction
– continued
The CDMA Communications System Analyzers listed above are capable
of calibrating the BTS for both IS–95 A and B Mode Operation as well
as CDMA2000 1X Operation.
NOTE
IS–95A/B Communication Test Sets such as the HP
8921A/600 and Advantest R3561L can not calibrate 1X
carrier functions.
Calibration and Test Set–up for the HP 8921A/600 and Advantest
R3561L Test Sets is included only for situations where it is necessary to
use them for Calibration of IS–95A/B Mode Operation.
H-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
Introduction
The ISC Procedure has several differences from a normal Calibration
Procedure. One of these is the use of a Spectrum
Analyzer/Communications Test Set instead of a Power Meter to measure
power.
– Power Meters are Broadband Measurement Devices and cannot be
used to measure power during ISC because other carriers are
operating.
– A Spectrum Analyzer can be used because it measures power at a
given frequency.
Measuring power using a Spectrum Analyzer is less accurate than using
a Power Meter, therefore, compensation is required for the Accuracy
Difference (Delta) between the Power Meter and the Spectrum Analyzer.
Agilent E4406A Power Delta
Calibration
The Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester and E4432B Signal Generator
Test Equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X
as well as IS–95A/B Operation Modes. The Power Delta Calibration is
performed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the
Reference Signal used to calculate the Power Delta offset. After the
Offset Value has been calculated, add it to the TX Test Cable Insertion
Loss Value in the LMF.
Preliminary Agilent Test Equipment Set–up
To provide proper operation during Power Delta Calibration, ensure that
the E4406A and E4432B are connected as shown in Figure F-18.
Power Delta Calibration
Perform the procedure in Table H-1 to perform the Agilent E4406A
Power Delta Calibration Procedure.
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60minutes.
– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “Test
Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the Signal
Generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to the
component being calibrated.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-3
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Ensure that the E4406A and E4432B are connected as shown in Figure F-18.
Connect a short RF Cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT Connector the HP437 Power Meter
Power Sensor.
– Refer to Figure H-1.
Set the E4432B Signal Generator by performing the following actions.
4a
Press Preset to exit any modes for which the Signal Generator is configured.
4b
Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the Numeric Keypad.
4c
Using the Softkeys to the right of the screen, select the Frequency Range to be measured; for
example: MHz.
4d
Press Amplitude and, using the Numeric Keypad, set the Signal Amplitude to 0 (zero).
4e
Using the Softkeys, set the measurement type to dBm.
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF ON.
– Note that the RF On/Off Status in the Screen Display changes.
Measure and record the Value Reading on the HP437 Power Meter as result.
A____________________
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF OFF.
– Note that the RF On/Off Status in the Screen Display changes.
Disconnect the short RF Cable from the HP437 Power Meter Power Sensor, and connect it to the
RF INPUT Connector on the E4406A Transmitter Tester.
– Refer to Figure H-2.
* IMPORTANT
Do not change the Frequency and Amplitude Settings on the E4432B when performing the
following actions.
Set the E4406A by performing the following actions.
9a
Press Preset to exit any modes for which the Transmitter Tester is configured.
9b
Press MODE and, using the Softkeys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne.
9c
Press MEASURE and, using the Softkeys, select spectrum.
9d
Press Frequency and, using the Softkeys, select Center Frequency.
9e
Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the Numeric Keypad.
9f
Using the Softkeys, select the Frequency Range to be measured; for example, MHz.
9g
Press Input/Output and, using the Softkeys, select Input Atten.
9h
Using the Numeric Keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the Softkeys, select dB.
table continued on next page
H-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
9i
Using the Softkeys, select External Atten and then select Mobile.
9j
Using the Numeric Keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the Softkeys, select dB.
9k
Using the Softkeys, select Base.
9l
Using the Numeric Keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the Softkeys, select dB.
9m
Press MEASURE and, using the Softkeys, select Channel Power.
10
On the E4432B Signal Generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF ON.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the Screen Display changes.
11
Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A Screen Display and record it as Result B.
B____________________.
12
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF Output to RF OFF.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the Screen Display changes.
13
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.
– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Agilent measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
NOTE
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.
– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6.
Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent E4432B to HP437
Agilent E4432B and E4406A
HP437B
SENSOR
RF OUTPUT
Power
Sensor
Short RF Cable
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-5
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A
Agilent E4432B and E4406A
RF OUTPUT
Short RF Cable
RF INPUT
H-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Advantest R3267 Power Delta
Calibration
The Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer and R3562 Signal Generator
Test Equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X
as well as IS–95A/B Operation Modes. The Power Delta Calibration is
performed on the R3267. After the Offset Value has been calculated, add
it to the TX Test Cable Insertion Loss Value.
Preliminary Advantest Test Equipment Set–up
To provide proper operation during Power Delta Calibration, ensure that
the R3267 is connected to the R3562 as shown in Figure F-19.
Power Delta Calibration
Perform the procedure in Table H-2 to perform the Advantest R3267
Power Delta Calibration Procedure.
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Warm-up Test Equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to this procedure.
– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “Test
Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Ensure that the R3267 and R3562 are connected as shown in Figure F-19.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET Keys located on the right side of the Control Panel.
Press the ADVANCE Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.
On the CRT, select RX Control by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.
On the CRT, select Frequency Set–up by pressing ACTIVE Key 3.
On the CRT, highlight Frequency by adjusting the DISPLAY CONTROL Knob.
Press FREQ Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.
Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.
10
Set the level to 0 dBm using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.
11
On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Modulation.
– If OFF is not highlighted, press the ACTIVE Key 5 to toggle it OFF.
12
On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Output.
– If OFF is not highlighted, press the ACTIVE Key 6 to toggle it OFF.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-7
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
13
Action
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the Signal
Generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to the
component being calibrated.
14
Connect the RF Cable from the R3562 Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the Power Sensor.
15
On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE Key 6.
16
Record the Power Meter Reading as result A.
A________________________
17
On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to OFF by pressing ACTIVE Key 6.
18
Connect the RF Cable from R3562 Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the R3267 Spectrum
Analyzer INPUT Port.
– Refer to Figure H-4.
19
On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE Key 6.
20
On the R3267, press the POWER Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.
21
Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.
22
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.
23
On the CRT, select dB/div by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.
24
On the CRT, select 10 dB/div by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.
25
Press the FREQ Key in ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.
26
Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.
27
On the CRT, select more 1/2 by pressing ACTIVE Key 7.
28
Press the Preselector CRT Menu Key to highlight 3.66G.
29
Press the POWER Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.
30
Press the SPAN Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.
31
On the CRT, select Zero Span by pressing ACTIVE Key 2.
32
Press the COUPLE Key in the ENTRY Section of the Control Panel.
33
On the CRT, select RBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE Key 3.
34
Set RBW to 30 kHz using Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.
35
On the CRT, select VBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE Key 2.
36
Set VBW to 1 MHz using Keypad ENTRY Section Keys.
table continued on next page
H-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
37
Press the MKR Key in the DISPLAY CONTROL section of the Control Panel.
38
On the CRT, select Normal Marker by pressing ACTIVE Key 1.
39
Record the Marker Level reading as Result B.
B________________________
40
Press Single in ENTRY Section of Control Panel.
41
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.
– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Advantest Measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.7 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
NOTE
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.
– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6.
Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Set–up – Advantest R3562 to HP437
Advantest R3562 and R3267
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
RF OUT
Short RF Cable
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-9
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Set–up – Advantest R3562 to R3267
Advantest R3562 and R3267
RF IN
Short RF Cable
RF OUT
H-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A
Power Delta Calibration
The Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) Communications Test Set
modified with either Option 200 or R2K and E4432B Signal Generator
Test Equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X
as well as IS–95A/B Operation Modes. The Power Delta Calibration is
performed on the Agilent 8935. After the Offset Value has been
calculated, add it to the TX Test Cable Insertion Loss Value.
Perform the procedure in Table H-3 to perform the Agilent 8935 Power
Delta Calibration Procedure.
Table H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “Test
Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the Signal
Generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF Cable between the Agilent 8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437 Power
Sensor.
– Refer to Figure H-5.
Set the Agilent 8935 Signal Source as follows:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Measure Mode to CDMA Gen
Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency
CW RF Path to IQ
Output Port to Dupl
Data Source to Random
Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the Power Value Reading on the HP437 Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter Reading as Result A.
A ________________________.
Turn off the Agilent 8935 Signal Source Output, and disconnect the HP437.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the Source Agilent 8935 for convenience in the following steps.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-11
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-3: Agilent 8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Connect the short RF Cable between the Agilent 8935 Duplex Out Port and the RF–IN/OUT Port.
– Refer to Figure H-6.
Ensure that the Source Agilent 8935 Settings are the same as in Step 3.
Set the Agilent 8935 as follows:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Measure Mode to CDMA Anl
Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency
Input Attenuation to 0 dB
Input Port to RF–IN
Gain to Auto
Anl Dir to Fwd
10
Turn on the Agilent 8935 Signal Output.
11
Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
12
Measure and record the Channel Power Reading on the measuring Agilent 8935 as Result B.
B ________________________
13
Turn off the Agilent 8935 Signal Output and disconnect the equipment.
14
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.
– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Advantest Measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
NOTE
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.
– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6.
Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent 8935 to HP437
Á
Á
ÁÁ
Agilent Agilent 8935
HP437B
SENSOR
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
Power
Sensor
FW00805
H-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Set–up – Agilent 8935 to Agilent 8935
Agilent E6380A
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00806
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-13
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
HP 8921A Power Delta
Calibration
Use the HP 8921A Communications Test Set to measure power during
ISC only for IS–95A and B Operation of 800 MHz Systems. After the
Offset Value has been calculated, add it to the TX Test Cable Insertion
Loss Value.
Perform the procedure in Table H-4 to perform the HP 8921A Power
Delta Calibration Procedure.
NOTE
This procedure requires two HP 8921A Communication
Test Sets.
Table H-4: HP 8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes. After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as
described in the “Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the Signal
Generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF Cable between the HP 8921A Duplex Out Port and the HP437 Power Sensor.
Refer to Figure H-7.
Set the HP 8921A Signal Source as follows:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Measure Mode to CDMA Generator
Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency
CW RF Path to IQ
Output Port to Dupl
Data Source to Random
Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the Power Value Reading on the HP437 Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter Reading as Result A.
A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP 8921A Signal Output, and disconnect the HP437.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP 8921A for convenience in the following steps.
table continued on next page
H-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-4: HP 8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Connect the short RF Cable between the source HP 8921A Duplex Out Port and the measuring
HP 8921A RF–IN Port.
– Refer to Figure H-8.
Ensure that the source HP 8921A Settings are the same as in Step 3.
Set the measuring HP 8921A as follows:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Measure Mode to CDMA Anl
Frequency to the CDMA Calibration Target Frequency
Input Attenuation to 0 dB
Input Port to RF–IN
Gain to Auto
Analyzer Direction to Fwd
10
Turn on the source HP 8921A Signal Output.
11
Measure and record the Channel Power Reading on the measuring HP 8921A as Result B.
B ________________________
12
Turn off the source HP 8921A Signal Output and disconnect the equipment.
13
Compute the Delta between HP437 and HP 8921A using the following formula.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
NOTE
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration.
– Refer to Step 4 in Table H-6.
Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Set–up – HP 8921A to HP437
HP 8921A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
FEB 2005
DUPLEX
OUT
Short RF Cable
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FW00801
H-15
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Set–up – HP 8921A to HP 8921A
Measurement HP 8921A
RF
IN/OUT
Source HP 8921A
Short RF Cable
DUPLEX
OUT
FW00802
H-16
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Advantest R3465 Power Delta
Calibration
Use the Advantest R3465 Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during
ISC only for IS–95A and B Operation. After the Offset Value has been
calculated, add it to the TX Test Cable Insertion Loss Value.
Perform the procedure in Table H-5 to perform the Advantest 3465
Power Delta Calibration Procedure.
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
– After it is warmed–up and stabilized, calibrate the Test Equipment as described in the “Test
Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET Keys located below the CRT Display.
Press the ADVANCE Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.
Press the CDMA Sig CRT Menu Key.
Press the FREQ Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad Entry Keys.
Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the Keypad Entry Keys.
Verify that the Mod CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF.
– If it is highlighted, press the Mod Key to toggle it OFF.
Verify that the Output CRT Menu Key highlighting is OFF,
– If it is highlighted, press the Output Key to toggle it OFF.
10
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the Power Sensor to the RF Cable from the Signal
Generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–Zero the Power Meter before connecting the Power Sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11
Connect the RF Cable from the R3561L CDMA Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the Power Sensor.
– Refer to Figure H-9.
12
Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle the Output to ON.
13
Record the Power Meter Reading as Result A.
A________________________.
14
Press the Output CRT Menu Key to toggle the Output to OFF.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-17
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
15
Action
Connect the RF Cable from the R3561L Signal Generator RF OUT Port to the R3465 INPUT Port.
– Refer to Figure H-10.
16
Press the Output CRT Menu Key to change the Output to ON.
17
Press the CW Key in the MEASUREMENT Area of the Control Panel.
18
Press the LEVEL Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.
19
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the Keypad Entry Keys.
20
Press the dB/div CRT Menu Key.
21
Press the 10 dB/div CRT Menu Key.
22
Press the FREQ Key in ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.
23
Set the frequency to the desired value using the Keypad Entry Keys.
24
Press the more 1/2 CRT Menu Key.
25
Press the Preselector CRT Menu Key to highlight 3.0G.
26
Press the FORMAT Key in the Display Control area of the Control Panel.
27
Press the TRACE CRT Menu Key.
28
Press the AVG A CRT Menu Key.
29
Set AVG to 20 using Keypad Entry Keys.
30
Press the return CRT Menu Key.
31
Press the SPAN Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.
32
Press the Zero Span CRT Menu Key.
33
Press the BW Key in the ENTRY Area of the Control Panel.
34
Press the RBW CRT Menu Key to highlight MNL. using Keypad Entry Keys enter 30 kHz.
35
Set RBW to 30 kHz using Keypad Entry Keys.
36
Press the VBW CRT Menu Key to highlight MNL.
37
Set VBW to 1 MHz using Keypad Entry Keys.
38
Press the Marker ON Key in the Display Control area of the Control Panel.
table continued on next page
H-18
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
n Step
39
Action
Record the Marker Level reading as Result B.
B________________________
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta Value.
– The Delta Value is the Power Meter Measurement minus the Advantest Measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
NOTE
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this Delta Value to the TX Cable Loss Value during In–Service Calibration. Refer to Step 4
in Table H-6.
Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Set–up – R3561L to HP437
Advantest
Power
Sensor
RF OUT
R3561L
HP437B
Short RF Cable
SENSOR
FW00803
Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Set–up – R3561L to R3465
Advantest
RF OUT
R3561L
Short RF Cable
R3465
INPUT
FEB 2005
FW00804
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-19
Power Delta Calibration
– continued
Notes
H-20
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
In–Service Calibration
In–Service Calibration
CAUTION
This feature does NOT have Fault Tolerance at this time.
The system has no safe–guards to prevent actions that will
put the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this
procedure during a Maintenance Window.
Perform the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise
the entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion
hardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL State.
The operator must be trained in the LMF Operation prior
to performing this procedure.
Prerequisites
S Any applicable expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC
Database, and a CDF that includes the additions has been generated.
S Any expansion devices have been inserted into the SCCP Cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL State at the CBSC MM.
S The site specific CDF (with any expansion hardware) and CAL Files
have been loaded onto the LMF.
S The LMF has the same Device Binary Code and DDS Files as the
CBSC.
CAUTION
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those
being worked on. Downloading code or data to other cards
will take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The Code File Version Numbers must match the current
BSS Software Release Version Numbers required for the
equipped devices. If the numbers do not match, the site
may go OUT OF SERVICE.
It is mandatory that the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.CDF
Files on the LMF Computer for this BTS are copies of the
corresponding files created in the CBSC Database. Refer to
Table 3-3.
The CAL File loaded on the LMF Computer for this BTS
must have come from the CBSC.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-21
In–Service Calibration
– continued
S Test Equipment has been connected as shown in Figure H-11 or
Figure H-12.
S An RFDS (or as a minimum, a Directional Coupler), whose Loss is
already known, must be in the applicable TX Antenna Path to perform
the In–service Calibration.
S Test Equipment has been calibrated after a 60–minute warm–up.
S A short RF Cable and two BNC–N Adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
S N–SMA Cable Adapters are available to connect to TRDC or DRDC
BTS CPLD Connectors, and are included in Test Cable Insertion Loss
Measurements.
S The Power Delta Calibration has been performed.
– Refer to Table H-1, Table H-2, Table H-3, Table H-4, or Table H-5.
H-22
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
In–Service Calibration
– continued
Figure H-11: TX Calibration Test Set–up – Agilent E4406A, Advantest R3267, and Agilent 8935 with
Option 200 or R2K (IS–95A/B and 1X CDMA 2000)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET–UP
Agilent E4406A
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC BTS CPLD
CONNECTOR.
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
GPIB
RF INPUT 50Ω,
INPUT 50Ω,
OR RF IN/OUT
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
RF INPUT
50 Ω
Advantest R3267
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
INPUT 50 Ω
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
HP–IB TO
GPIB
BOX
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
GPIB ADRS
TO
MPC
BTS
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
FREQ
MONITOR
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
CSM
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
RF IN/OUT
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
NOTE:
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
THE AGILENT 8935 MUST BE EQUIPPED WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K
TO PERFORM 1X TX TESTING .
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-23
In–Service Calibration
– continued
Figure H-12: TX Calibration Test Set–up – HP 8921A/600 w/PCS Interface (1.9 GHz),
HP 8921A/600 (800 MHz), and Advantest R3465 (IS–95A/B only)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET–UP
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1900 MHz)
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED
RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT
THE TX TEST CABLE TO
THE DRDC BTS CPLD
CONNECTOR.
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM ANALYZER
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
GPIB
RF IN/OUT
OR INPUT 50Ω
RF
IN/OUT
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
GPIB
CABLE
TRDC
RX
RX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
TX
TX
BTS ANT
CPLD CPLD
2O DB
IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
RF
IN/OUT
* BLACK RECTANGLES
REPRESENT THE RAISED
PART OF SWITCHES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
INTERNAL
RX
CABLE
Advantest Model R3465
INTERNAL
TX
CABLE
GPIB ADRS
TO
MPC
BTS
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
INPUT 50Ω
CSM
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
H-24
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FREQ
MONITOR
LAN
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
TO LPA
TRUNKING
MODULE
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FEB 2005
In–Service Calibration
– continued
Perform the procedure in Table H-6 to perform the In–Service
Calibration.
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after Test Equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Set–up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:
1a
Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF Icon on the Windows Desktop.
1b
Click Tools > Options from the Menu Bar in the LMF Application Window.
1c
In the LMF Options Window, check only the applicable Communications System Analyzer
Check Box on the Test Equipment Tab.
1d
Ensure that the GPIB Address is 18.
1e
Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
1f
Click the Apply Button.
1g
Select the BTS Options Tab in the LMF Options Window.
1h
Check the In–Service Calibration Check Box.
1i
Click the Apply Button.
1j
Click the Dismiss Button to close the LMF Options Window.
Log into the target BTS:
2a
Select the target BTS Icon.
2b
Click the Login Button at the Login Screen.
Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration Function:
3a
Click Util > Cable Calibration... in the BTS Menu Bar in the Main Window.
3b
Set the desired Channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL from the Cable Calibration
Window Pull–down Menu.
3c
Click the OK Button to perform Cable Calibration.
3d
Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the Test Cable Insertion Loss Measurement.
NOTE
The measured value is input automatically to the Test Cable Insertion Loss File.
To view the Test Cable Insertion Loss File, click Util > Examine > Cable Loss from the BTS
Menu Bar.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-25
In–Service Calibration
– continued
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
Add the Communications System Analyzer Power Delta to the TX Cable Loss.
4a
In the BTS Menu Bar, click Util > Edit > Cable Loss... > TX.
4b
Add the value computed in Table H-4, Table H-5, or Table H-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Ensure to include the sign of the value.
The following examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual
readings:
–
–
–
–
Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20dBm
Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm
Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm
Input the Coupler Loss for the TX Tests:
5a
In the BTS Menu Bar, click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss... from the Menu Bar in the Main
Window.
5b
Select the TX Coupler Loss Ta,b if not in the foreground.
5c
Enter the appropriate Coupler Loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of the BTS Installation.
5d
Click the Save Button.
5e
Click the Dismiss Button to close the window.
5f
To view the Coupler Loss File, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss in the BTS Menu Bar.
Input the Coupler Loss for the RX Tests:
6a
In the BTS Menu Bar, click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss... from the Menu Bar in the Main
Window.
6b
Select the RX Coupler Loss Tab, if not in the foreground.
6c
Enter the appropriate Coupler Loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of the BTS Installation.
6d
Click the Save Button.
6e
Click the Dismiss Button to close the window.
6f
To view the Coupler Loss File, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss in the BTS Menu Bar.
table continued on next page
H-26
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
In–Service Calibration
– continued
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
If it was not previously done, have the CBSC Operator put the Redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only.
– Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE and can result in dropped calls.
The Code File Version Numbers must match the Version Numbers on the other cards in the frame.
If the numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the Redundant BBX in Steps 8, 9, and 10.
Download code and data to the target devices:
8a
In the LMF Window Menu Bar, click Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA to set the Code
Version that will be downloaded.
8b
Check the appropriate Code Version in the Pop–up Window and click the Save Button to close.
8c
Select the target BBX(s) on the SCCP Cage picture.
8d
In the BTS Menu Bar, click Device > Download > Code/Data to start downloading code and data.
! CAUTION
Perform the All Cal/Audit Procedure on OOS devices only.
Run the All Cal/Audit Procedure:
9a
Select the target BBX(s) on the SCCP Cage picture.
9b
In the BTS Menu Bar, click Tests > All Cal/Audit... from the Menu Bar in the Main Window.
9c
Select the target carrier and confirm the Channel Number in the Pop–up Window.
9d
Leave the Verify BLO Check Box checked.
9e
Ensure that the Test Pattern Box shows Pilot.
9f
Click the OK Button to start Calibration.
9g
Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS Antenna Port.
9h
Connect to the DRDC or TRDC BTS CPL Port associated with the on–screen prompted Antenna
Port.
10
Save the result, and download the BLO Data to the target BBX(s):
– Click the Save Result Button on the result screen.
–– The window closes automatically.
11
Logout from the BTS and close the LMF Session:
11a
In the BTS Menu Bar, click Select > Logout to close the BTS Connection.
11b
Close the LMF Application Program by selecting File > Exit from the Window Menu Bar.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
H-27
In–Service Calibration
– continued
Table H-6: In–Service Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
12
Disconnect all Test Cables from the BTS.
13
reconnect RFDS Cables or Termination Loads, as applicable, to the DRDC or TRDC BTS CPL
Ports used for the Calibration.
14
Advise the CBSC to enable the target device(s).
15
Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC.
– Refer to Table 4-12.
H-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Appendix I: Packet Backhaul Configuration
Appendix Content
BTS Router Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Router Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FTP File Transfer from the OMC–R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOS Version Verification and File Sequence Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canned Configuration File Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method 1: Using a TFTP Server to Load to CF Memory Card . . . . . .
Method 2: Using a CF Memory Card Reader to Load
CF Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
I-1
I-2
I-2
I-4
I-7
I-7
I-7
I-7
I-13
I-13
I-13
I-14
I-15
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment and Software Required for Verification Methods . . . . . . . .
Required Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method 1: Replacement of Installed Router CF Card IOS Data . . . . . .
Method 2: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacement of
Installed IOS Version and Changing File Sequence Position . . . . . . .
Change CF Memory Card File Sequence to Place IOS File First
on the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment and Software Required for Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method 1: In–Router Verification and Replacement of Installed
ROMMON Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method 2: Verification and Replacement of Installed
ROMMON Version Using a CF Memory Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-41
I-41
I-41
I-41
I-42
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Recovery from Boot to ROMMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Recovery from Boot to ROMMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-31
I-50
I-55
I-64
I-64
I-64
I-65
I-65
I-71
I-64
I-77
I-77
I-77
I-82
Table of Contents
– continued
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-77
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering or Changing FE Interface IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Router Canned Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining the Latest Configuration File Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration File Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Blue” BTS Router Canned Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Red” BTS Router Canned Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-86
I-86
I-86
I-86
I-90
I-90
I-90
I-90
I-92
Preparation for Site Turn–over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for Site Turn–over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning the Site to OMC–R Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What to Do Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-95
I-95
I-95
I-96
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
BTS Router Initial Configuration
Overview
This appendix contains information and operations related to loading an
MWR 1941 BTS Router with the minimum standard (canned)
configuration necessary for network communications. Once the BTS
Router is communicating on the network, the full, site-specific,
Operational Configuration can be downloaded to the BTS Router over
the network. This appendix includes sections on:
Terminal Set–up
Downloading the Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
Verifying the IOS Canned Version of CF Memory Card
Replacing the installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Verify and upgrade the ROMMON Version
Recovery from the BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
Entering or changing the Router FE Interface IP Address
Preparation for Site Turn–over
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-1
Terminal Setup
General
This section provides the procedures to configure and save a Terminal
Session for communicating with the MWR 1941 BTS Router. Terminal
Settings are the same as those used for BTS Card/Module Man–Machine
Interface (MMI) Communication Sessions. The procedures are for a
Pentiumr Processor–based Computer operating with either Windows 98
Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000..
Using the LMF Computer
LMF Computer Platforms can be used for communicating with the BTS
Routers, and the MMI Terminal Connection, created for BTS
Card/Module Optimization Actions, will operate with the BTS Routers.
See the “Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session” section of
this appendix for additional Interface Hardware required for BTS Router
Communication..
Terminal Settings
Perform the procedure in Table I-1 to create a named HyperTerminal
Connection for BTS Router interface and generate a Windows Desktop
Shortcut for it.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows
98 in the menus and screens used for creating a
HyperTerminal Connection. In the following procedure,
items applicable to:
S Windows 2000 will be identified with Win2000
S Windows 98 will be identified with Win98
Table I-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
n Step
Action
From the Windows Start Menu, select Programs > Accessories
Perform one of the following:
S For Win2000, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal.
S For Win98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal Folder, and then double
click on the Hypertrm.exe icon in the window that opens.
NOTE
S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the
Close Button.
– This is required the first time a HyperTerminal Connection is configured, even if a modem is
not to be used.
S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.
table continued on next page
I-2
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Terminal Setup
– continued
Table I-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
n Step
Action
When the Connection Description Box opens, perform the following actions.
3a
Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, BTSRTR Session, MMI) in the
Name: Window.
3b
Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: Chooser Window.
3c
Click OK.
From the Connect using: Pick List in the Connect To Box displayed, perform the following
actions.
4a
Select the RS–232 Port to be used for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win2000 or Direct
to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 – Win98).
4b
Click OK.
In the Port Settings Tab of the COM# Properties Window displayed, configure the RS–232 Port
Settings as follows:
Bits per Second: 9600
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
Flow Control: None
Click OK.
With the HyperTerminal Window still open and the connection running, select:
File > Properties
Click the Settings Tab, click the arrow in the Emulation Window, and select VT100 from the
Pull–down Menu.
Click the ASCII Set–up Button, uncheck all boxes in the ASCII Set–up Window that appears,
and click OK.
10
Click OK for the Connection Properties Box.
11
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File > Save
12
Close the HyperTerminal Window by selecting:
File > Exit
13
Click the Yes Button to disconnect when prompted.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-3
Terminal Setup
– continued
Table I-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
n Step
14
Action
Perform one of the following:
S If the Hyperterminal Folder Window is still open (Win98), proceed to Step 16.
OR
S From the Windows Start Menu, select Programs > Accessories
15
Perform one of the following:
S For Win2000, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed Mouse Buttons.
OR
S For Win98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal Folder.
16
Highlight the newly–created Connection Icon by moving the cursor over it (Win2000) or clicking
on it (Win98).
17
Right click and drag the highlighted Connection Icon to the Windows Desktop and release the
right Mouse Button.
18
From the Pop–up Menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
19
If desired, reposition the Shortcut Icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location
on the Windows Desktop.
NOTE
The Shortcut Icon can now be double–clicked to open a BTS Router or BTS Card/Module MMI
HyperTerminal Session without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
I-4
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Terminal Setup
– continued
BTS Router Serial
Communication
For those procedures that require Serial Communication with BTS
Routers, perform the procedure in Table I-2 to initiate the
Communication Session. This procedure calls out the LMF Computer
Platform, but any VT100–equivalent terminal or computer equipped
with Terminal Emulation Software and a Hardware Serial Connector
may be used.
Required Items
The following items are required to perform the verification:
S LMF Computer Platform or equivalent.
– Refer to this manual for requirements.
S Eight–conductor (four–pair, unshielded twisted pair is acceptable)
Rollover Cable, two 8–contact Modular Plugs.
– Refer to Figure I-1 for Cable Wiring Requirements.
S Adapter, DB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug, Global Computer
Supplies C4717 or equivalent.
– Refer to Figure I-2 for Adapter Wiring Requirements.
Figure I-1: Wiring Diagram, BTS Router Communication Rollover Cable
8–contact Plug
Contact Numbering
(Insertion End)
8 76543 21
Locking
Clip
8–contact
Modular
Plug
8–contact
Modular
Plug
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-5
Terminal Setup
– continued
Figure I-2: Wiring Diagram, DB–9 Plug–to–8–Contact Modular Plug Adapter
Adapter
DB–9 Receptacle
Socket Numbering
(Mating Side)
4 3 2 1
DB–9
Receptacle
8–contact
Modular
Receptacle
NC
Adapter
8–contact Receptacle
Contact Numbering
(Mating Side)
12 34567 8
8 7 6
NC
Table I-2: Establishing BTS Router Serial Communication
n Step
Action
If it has not been done, start the computer and allow it to complete the Boot Process.
If a named HyperTerminal Connection for BTS Router Serial Communication or BTS
Card/Module MMI Communication has not been created on the LMF Computer, create one as
described in Table I-1 in the “Terminal Set–up” section of this appendix.
Connect the computer to the BTS Router as shown in Figure I-3.
Start the named HyperTerminal Connection for BTS Router Communication Sessions by double
clicking on its Windows Desktop Shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows Desktop Shortcut was not created for the Communication Session, access the
connection from the Windows Start Menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal >
Once the connection window opens, establish communication with the BTS Router by pressing
the computer Enter Key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
I-6
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Terminal Setup
– continued
Figure I-3: LMF Computer Connections to BTS Router
ROLLOVER
CABLE
To BTS
Router
CONSOLE
receptacle
DB9–TO–RJ48C
ADAPTER
LMF COMPUTER
OR EQUIVALENT
COM1
OR
COM2
OPTOATP0001–0
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-7
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
Downloading Overview
After they are generated on the OMC–R, the BTS Router Canned
Configuration Files must be transferred to another computer platform
from which they can be installed into the BTS Routers. A number of
procedures may be used to move the Canned Configuration Files from
the OMC–R to a platform from which they can be loaded into the BTS
Routers. Some alternatives are:
1. If a Floppy Diskette drive is available at the OMC–R, such as the
one for UNO Workstations, the Configuration Files can be
transferred to an LMF Computer or similar machine using the CDF
File Transfer Procedure in the Preparing the LMF section of this
manual. Directories identified in Table I-3 must be used rather than
those in the CDF File Transfer Procedure.
2. If a Windows–based Server Connection is available in the operator’s
network and it can provide an FTP or Telnet Connection to the
OMC–R, files may be transferred by either the FTP or Telnet
methods.
3. If a Dial–up Connection is available for accessing the OMC–R, an
FTP or Telnet Session may be possible to transfer files to the
computer used to load the CF Memory Cards.
The procedure provided in this section covers FTP Transfer using a
Windows–based Server in the operator’s network. Coordinate with the
Local Network Administrator to determine the method and procedure to
use on a specific network.
Prerequisites
The following must be obtained from the Local Network Administrator
before performing the Canned Configuration File FTP Procedure in
Table I-3:
S User ID and Password to log onto the OMC–R
S Name of the subdirectory where the specific BTS Router Group
Canned Configuration Files to be downloaded were created.
FTP File Transfer from the
OMC–R
This procedure uses the Windows–based LMF Computer Platform to
download BTS Router Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R.
Perform the procedure in Table I-3.
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
n Step
Action
If it has not been done, create a directory on the LMF Computer where the BTS Router Canned
Configuration Files will be stored.
If it has not been done, obtain the OMC–R Logon User ID and Password from the Local Network
Administrator.
table continued on next page
I-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
n Step
Action
Connect the LMF Computer to the local network and log on.
NOTE
This procedure uses the Command Line FTP Client supplied with Windows 98, Second Edition
(Win98 SE) and Windows 2000 (Win2K); however, any commercially available FTP Client
Application can be used.
– Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operation of an alternative application.
Open a Command Line (MS DOS) Window by clicking on Start > Programs > Command
Prompt.
When the Command Line Window opens, change to the directory where the Canned
Configuration Files will be stored on the LMF Computer by entering:
cd pathname
– Where pathname = the path to the required directory.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\> cd Can_Cfg
C:\Can_Cfg>
Check the contents of the directory by entering the following command.
dir
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\Can_Cfg>dir
Volume in drive C is MAIN
Volume Serial Number is F2AA–1721
Directory of C:\Can_Cfg>
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
03:46p
03:46p
..
03:46p
2,223 btsrtr_canned.blue
03:47p
2,223 btsrtr_canned.red
2 File(s)
4,644 bytes
2 Dir(s)
2,556,045,312 bytes free
C:\Can_Cfg>
If either or both of the following files are found in the directory, delete them or move them to
another directory:
– btsrtr_config.blue
– btsrtr_config.red
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-9
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
n Step
Action
Begin the FTP Session by entering the following command.
FTP hostname
– Where hostname = the OMC–R hostname or IP Address.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\Can_Cfg> FTP OMC–R–1
C:\Can_Cfg>
Connected to OMC–R–1.
220 OMC–R–1 FTP Server (SunOS 5.6) ready.
User (OMC–R–1:(none)):
Enter the User ID and Password when prompted, pressing the Enter Key after each.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
User (OMC–R–1:(none)): scadm
331 Password required for scadm.
Password:
230 User scadm logged in.
FTP>
10
Change to the directory where the BTS Router Canned Configuration File Subdirectories are
created.
11
Verify that the present Working Directory by entering the following commands, pressing the
Enter Key after each:
cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs
pwd
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs
240 CWD command successful.
FTP> pwd
245 ”/home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs” is current directory.
table continued on next page
I-10
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
n Step
12
Action
Enter the ls Command to list the contents of the directory and ensure that the specific Canned
Configuration Directory Name provided by the administrator exists.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> ls
200 PORT command successful.
150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).
Mon_Jul_2_01:55:07_CDT_2002
Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002
Tue_Aug_04_10:35:22_CDT_2002
226 ASCII Transfer complete.
FTP: 30 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 1.50Kbytes/sec.
FTP>
NOTE
Directory Names where Canned Configuration Files are located will consist of the
weekday_month_day_time_year when the Canned Configuration Files were created on the
OMC–R.
13
Change to the directory specified for the BTS Router Group to be configured and list the directory
contents by entering the following, pressing the Enter Key after each command:
cd weekday_month_day_time_year
ls
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> cd Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002
250 CWD command successful.
FTP> ls
200 PORT command successful.
150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).
btsrtr_canned.blue
btsrtr_canned.red
226 ASCII Transfer complete.
FTP: 39 bytes received in 0.05Seconds 0.78Kbytes/sec.
FTP>
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-11
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
n Step
14
Action
Change to the Binary Transfer Mode and, if desired, turn on Hash Mark Printing for transfer
progress by entering the following, pressing the Enter Key after each command:
bin
hash
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> bin
200 Type set to I.
FTP> hash
Hash mark printing On
FTP>
FTP: (2048 bytes/hash mark).
NOTE
With Win98 SE, turning on Hash Mark Printing can slow down File Transfer in certain
circumstances, but the Canned Configuration Files are quite small (approximately 2.5 KB) so
there should be little noticeable effect.
15
Download the BTS Router Canned Configuration Files to the LMF Computer by performing the
following actions.
15a
Enter the following to download the first Canned Configuration File:
get btsrtr_canned.blue
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> get btsrtr_canned.blue
200 PORT command successful.
150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.blue (10.182.29.117,80) (2223 bytes).
226 Binary Transfer complete.
FTP: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.
FTP>
15b
Enter the following to download the second BTS Router Canned Configuration File:
get btsrtr_canned.red
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> get btsrtr_canned.red
200 PORT command successful.
150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.red (10.182.29.117,80) (2223 bytes).
226 Binary Transfer complete.
FTP: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.
FTP>
table continued on next page
I-12
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
n Step
Action
16
Before terminating the FTP Session, open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the
directory where the Canned Configuration Files are to be stored to ensure that the files are present.
Perform the following actions.
16a
Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer.
16b
In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform one of the following depending on the LMF
Computer Operating System:
– Win98 SE: If necessary, expand the Directory Display for the drive where the Canned
Configuration File Storage Directory is located by clicking on the + next to the Drive Icon.
– Win2K: Expand the User Profile and Directory Display for the drive where the Canned
Configuration File Storage Directory is located by clicking on the + next to each icon,
respectively.
16c
Expand any subdirectories as required to display the directory folder where the Canned
Configuration Files are to be stored.
16d
Click on the Directory Folder Icon where the Canned Configuration Files are to be stored.
16e
In the right–hand pane, verify that the files btsrtr_canned.blue and btsrtr_canned.red
appear.
16f
If the files appear, proceed to Step 17.
16g
If the files do not appear, repeat Step 15, its substeps, Step 16, and its substeps.
17
Close Windows Explorer.
18
In the Command Line Window, enter the bye Command to terminate the FTP Session.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
FTP> bye
221 Goodbye.
C:\Can_Cfg>
19
Close the Command Line Window by entering the exit Command.
20
BTS Router Canned Configuration Files are now ready for transfer to a BTS Router.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-13
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
Overview
This section covers the procedures and commands required to verify that
the IOS Version loaded on BTS Router CF Memory Cards and copy
standard Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Routers. Because of the
set–up required and the length of some of the procedures, Motorola
recommends performing the actions covered in this section at a central
location to prepare the BTS Routers for installation prior to the site visit.
IOS Version Verification and
File Sequence Position
Version Verification
The IOS Version loaded on the BTS Router CF Memory Card should be
verified as the version required for operation on the network where the
BTS Routers will be installed. If the loaded IOS Version is not correct, it
can be replaced with a different version.
There are several methods available to accomplish Version Verification.
These depend on the equipment and Software Applications the user
selects to use in installing the Canned Configuration Files in the BTS
Routers. Appropriate Verification Procedures are included in each of the
two Canned Configuration Installation Methods covered in this section.
Methods to change the loaded IOS Version are provided in the Change
BTS Router IOS Version section of this appendix and are referenced at
the appropriate places in the Canned Configuration Installation
Methods..
File Sequence Position
During Initialization, the MWR 1941 Router will first search the
startup–config File for a Boot System Command Line telling it in
what directory and file to find the Boot Loader. If this line is not found,
the BTS Router will default to attempting to boot from the first file in its
Flash Memory.
Flash Memory for the MWR 1941 is the CF Memory Card (Software
Identifier slot0:). The Canned Configuration Files used for BTS Router
installation do not contain a Boot System Command Line because of the
need to maintain flexibility for IOS Version changes. Because of this, it
is critical that the IOS File is the first file listed on the CF Memory Card.
The Canned Configuration Installation Procedures contain Steps to
assure that this is the case, and, if it is not, provide guidance to correct
the condition. It is important to remember that, if the BTS Router boots
and displays a rommon 1 > Prompt, the IOS File is missing, out of
sequence, has a corrupted Flash Memory Image, or the
startup–config File contains a Boot System Line that specifies a
missing or incorrect IOS Pathname/Filename..
I-14
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Canned Configuration File
Installation
Filename and Installation Location Requirements
The Canned Configuration Files for the BTS Routers must be copied to
the CF Memory Card. The filename of the file on the CF Memory Card
must be canned–config.
Canned Configuration File Location and Filename Requirements are a
result of Mobile Wireless Center (MWC) Actions during the process of
switching a BTS from Packet to Circuit Mode. In this process, the MWC
will query the BTS Routers’ slot0: Directory for a file named
canned–config. A missing or misnamed file will cause problems with
execution of the Mode–switching Process..
Installation Methods
The startup–config Configuration File used by the BTS Router
during Initialization is stored in NVRAM. This is a memory device
internal to the BTS Router and is separate from the CF Memory Card.
To install the Canned Configuration File so the BTS Router will use it
during Boot–up, the file must be copied into the startup–config File
in NVRAM.
There are two methods available to accomplish this.:
1. Using a TFTP Server Application to copy the Canned Configuration
File from the Windows–based LMF Computer to the CF Memory
Card installed in a BTS Router, and then copying it to the
startup–config File in the BTS Router’s NVRAM.
2. Using a CF Memory Card Reader to copy the Canned Configuration
File to a CF Memory Card, and then, once the CF Memory Card is
installed in the BTS Router, using a HyperTerminal Communication
Session to copy the file from the CF Memory Card to the
startup–config File in the BTS Router’s NVRAM.
Comparison of Methods
Preparation for using the TFTP Server Application Method is extensive
and requires setting up simultaneous Serial and FE Communication
Sessions with the BTS Router. This method offers the advantage of
being able to verify IOS File Sequence Position immediately, and
supporting Direct File Transfers between the BTS Router and LMF
Computer without removing the CF Memory Card.
As an alternative, using a CF Memory Card Reader to copy the Canned
Configuration File to a CF Memory Card, and from there to the
startup–config File requires very little set–up. With this method, the
IOS File Sequence Position can only be verified once the CF Memory
Card is installed in the BTS Router, and any file transfers between the
BTS Router and LMF Computer require physically moving the CF
Memory Card between the BTS Router and Card Reader..
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-15
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Procedures to use Each Method
Using the TFTP Server Application to copy the Canned Configuration
File to a CF Memory Card is covered in the Method 1 subsection.
Performing the Transfer Process with a Card Reader is covered in the
Method 2 subsection. The applicable procedures for verifying the loaded
IOS Version and File Sequence Position are included in each method..
File Operations using a CF Memory Card Reader
File Transfers should only be performed using the CF Memory Card
Reader. CF Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTS
Router using a HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CF
Memory Card from a Windows–based computer using a Card Reader
could result in unpredictable BTS Router Operation..
CAUTION
Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using a
Windows–based computer. Format CF Memory Cards only
in a BTS Router.
Method 1: Using a TFTP Server
to Load to CF Memory Card
Required Equipment and Software
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMF
Computer Platform as specified in this manual.
S One of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File System
CAUTION
BTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S One of the following for the Windows–based computer:
– Internal 10/100baseT Network Interface Card (NIC)
– PCMCIA 10/100baseT NIC
I-16
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
S Cable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)
S Cable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
appendix
S A TFTP Server Software Application (refer to the Setting Up the
TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation) such as:
– Cisco TFTP Server
– PumpKIN TFTP Server
– Any other equivalent TFTP Server Application
S A copy of the MWR 1941 Router IOS Version required for the
network in which the BTS Routers are to be installed. (Contact the
Network Administrator or the Motorola Account Team for information
on obtaining the required MWR 1941 IOS Version.)
S A +27V DC Power Supply Module to power the BTS Router during
Configuration File Operations
Required Materials
The following material is required to perform this method:
S Marking material to identify the BTS Router and CF Memory Card
with the installed configuration (blue or red)
Required Publications
The following publications are required to perform procedures in this
section:
S this manual: 1X SC4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP manual
(68P09262A58)
S Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-17
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Preparation for Canned Configuration File TFTP Transfer to
CF Memory Card
Preparation for a Canned Configuration File TFTP Transfer consists of
the following activities:
1. Setting the LMF Computer NIC IP Address
2. Creating a directory (folder) on the LMF Computer to be used for all
TFTP File Transfers
3. Installing the TFTP Server Application on the LMF Computer, and
setting the TFTP Server Application Root Directory to the directory
created in 2, above
4. Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for both
HyperTerminal (serial) and Ethernet Communication
5. BTS Router Power–up and Initial Configuration for Ethernet
Communication
The following procedures are used to accomplish all of these preparatory
actions.
Set LMF Computer NIC TCP/IP Address and Create the
Default TFTP Directory
Perform the procedure in Table I-4 to set the NIC IP Address..
IMPORTANT
If the IP Address for the LAN Connection on an LMF
Computer is being changed to support TFTP Downloads to
a BTS Router, the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and
Subnet Mask for the NIC must be restored before the LMF
can log into a BTS to perform an Optimization or ATP.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows
98 in the menus and screens used for setting or changing a
NIC Connection. In the following procedure, items
applicable to:Windows 2000 will be identified with
Win2000Windows 98 will be identified with Win98
Table I-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP Directory
n Step
Action
Start the computer.
Login and allow the computer to boot to the Desktop.
table continued on next page
I-18
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP Directory
n Step
Action
Depending on the installed Operating System, from the Windows Start Menu, select one of the
following:
S Win2000: Settings > Network and Dial–up Connections
S Win98: Settings > Control Panel and double–click Network.
Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed Operating System:
S For Win2000, in the list of displayed connections, locate the Local Area Network Connection
for the NIC to be used for BTS Router Ethernet Communication.
S For Win98, in the Configuration Tab of the Network Dialog Box, locate the TCP/IP
Connection for the installed NIC.
– If TCP/IP does not appear in the displayed list of installed network components, refer to the
Operating System Documentation and install TCP/IP.
Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed Operating System:
S For Win2000:
– Highlight the connection for the NIC.
– Right–click the highlighted connection.
– Select Properties from the Pop–up Menu.
S For Win98:
– Highlight the TCP/IP NIC Connection in the displayed list of installed network components.
– Click the Properties Button.
– Skip to Step 8.
For Win2000 , in the Local Area Connection Properties Dialog Box that appears:
S if Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is showing in the Components checked are used by this
connection: List Box, proceed to Step 7.
S if Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is not showing in the Components checked are used by this
connection: List Box, refer to the Operating System Documentation and install TCP/IP.
For Win2000, if the Check Box next to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Entry is not checked, click
in the box to check it.
Perform one of the following:
S Win2000:
– Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Entry.
– Click on the Properties Button below the Components checked are used by this
connection: List Box.
S Win98:
– From the Tabs displayed in the TCP/IP Properties Dialog Box that opens, select the IP
Address Tab if it is not at the front.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-19
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP Directory
n Step
I-20
Action
In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog Box that appears (Win2000) or the IP
Address Tab of the TCP/IP Properties Dialog Box (Win98), perform the following actions.
9a
If a black dot is not showing in the the Radio Button Circle next to Use the following IP
Address: (Win2000) or Specify an IP Address (Win98), click on the Radio Button.
– A black dot will appear in the circle.
9b
If using an LMF Computer, record the IP Address and Subnet Mask used for LMF–BTS
Communication so they can be re–entered when TFTP Transfer Activities for the BTS Router are
completed.
9c
Enter 100.100.100.1 in the IP Address: Box.
9d
Enter 255.255.255.252 in the Subnet Mask: Box.
10
Click the OK Button for the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog Box (Win2000) or
the TCP/IP Properties Box (Win98).
11
Click the OK Button for the Local Area Connection Properties Box (Win2000) or the Network
Box (Win98).
12
In Win98, click File > Close to close the Control Panel Window.
13
Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
14
If the Default TFTP Directory is to be the same directory in which the files downloaded from the
OMC–R are stored, proceed to Step 22.
15
In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, locate the icon for the drive where the Default TFTP
Directory is to be created.
16
Highlight the Drive Icon and click Files > New > Folder.
17
While observing the new folder icon in the right–hand pane, type the name for the folder (for
example, TFTP_files), and press the Enter Key.
18
In Windows Explorer, locate the directory where the Canned Configuration Files that were
downloaded from the OMC–R are stored.
19
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.
20
Scroll the left–hand pane until the newly–created Default TFTP Directory is visible.
21
In the right–hand pane, highlight the Canned Configuration Files and drag them to the Default
TFTP Directory.
22
In the left–hand pane, click on the Default TFTP Directory, and verify that the Canned
Configuration Files appear in the right–hand pane.
23
Load a copy of the required BTS Router IOS Version into the Default TFTP Directory using FTP,
Internet Download, or media such as a Zip Disk (file size is over 7 MB).
24
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Install and Configure TFTP Server Application
To obtain, install, and configure the Cisco or PumpKIN TFTP Software
Applications, refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in
Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation For
other TFTP Server Applications, install and configure the application
according to the manufacturer’s instructions..
IMPORTANT
When entering the name of the TFTP Server Root
Directory while configuring the TFTP Server Application,
be sure to use the name of the directory identified in
Table I-4, Step 14, or created in Table I-4, Step 17, above.
Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router
Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router by performing the
procedure in Table I-5 and referring to Figure I-4..
Table I-5: Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for TFTP File Transfer
n Step
Action
If the BTS Router has not been connected to a Power Source, perform the following actions.
1a
Ensure that the +27V DC Power Source is not ON.
1b
Connect the BTS Router to the +27V DC Power Source.
Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router as shown in Figure I-4, referring to the list of
required equipment in this section as required.
If the LMF Computer has not been started, turn it on, Login, and allow it to boot to the Desktop.
Start a HyperTerminal Communication Session for the BTS Router.
– Refer to the procedure in Table I-2 of this appendix.
Start the TFTP Server Application as specified for the software.
– Refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration –
CDMA OnLine Documentation or the manufacturer’s instructions.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-21
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Figure I-4: LMF Computer TFTP Connections to BTS Router
FAST ETHERNET PORT FE 0
(SOFTWARE DESIGNATION FA0/0)
CONSOLE
PORT
ETHERNET
CROSSOVER
CABLE
ROLLOVER
CABLE
To BTS
Router
CONSOLE
receptacle
DB9–TO–RJ48C
ADAPTER
LMF COMPUTER
OR EQUIVALENT
COM1
OR
COM2
10/100BASE T
NIC PORT
BTSRTR0025
I-22
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
BTS Router Power–up and Initial Configuration for Ethernet
Communication
Perform the procedure in Table I-6 to apply power to the BTS Router
and set an Initial Configuration for Ethernet Communication.
S Ensure that the required version of the IOS is loaded on the CF
Memory Card.
S Ensure that the CF Memory Card is installed in the BTS Router.
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration Procedure
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
Ensure that a CF Memory Card loaded with the Cisco IOS is installed in the BTS Router.
– Refer to the BTS Router Card and Module Replacement section of the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS
FRU manual (68P09262A60) for instructions to access the CF Memory Card Slot.
* IMPORTANT
In Step 2, do not touch the computer keyboard until the BTS Router completes the Boot Process.
The BTS Router buffers any keystrokes made during the Boot Process and interprets them as
commands to be executed immediately following completion of the Boot Process.
Apply power to the BTS Router and allow it to complete the Boot Process.
S If a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter Key and proceed to Step 3.
Press RETURN to get started!
S If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter Key:
Basic management set–up configures only enough connectivity
for management of the system, extended set–up will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Would you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]: no
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobin
Router>
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-23
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration Procedure
n Step
Action
At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXEC
Mode:
enable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
At the Router# Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Configure
Submode:
configure terminal
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
– The BTS Router is now in the Global Configuration Mode and ready to accept configuration
changes entered from the keyboard.
At the Global Configuration Mode Prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing the
Enter Key after each command:
hostname btsrtr1
interface fa0/0
ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
speed 100
duplex full
no shutdown
line con 0
exec–timeout 0 0
no Login
line vty 0 4
no Login
– Responses similar to the following will be displayed:
Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1
BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0
BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100
BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex full
BTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdown
BTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no Login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no Login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#
table continued on next page
I-24
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration Procedure
n Step
Action
Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt by
holding down the Ctrl Key and pressing z (Ctrl+z).
– A response similar to the following will be displayed.
BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
Entering exit twice and pressing the Enter Key after each entry, will also complete the
Configuration Process and return the BTS Router to the Privileged EXEC Mode.
Verify that Port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP Address by entering the following
command.
show ip interface brief
– A response similar to the following will be displayed.
BTSRTR1#sh ip int br
Interface
IP Address
OK?
FastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES
Serial0:0
unassigned
YES
FastEthernet0/1 unassigned
YES
Serial1:0
unassigned
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
administratively down
administratively down
administratively down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
BTSRTR1#
The BTS Router is now configured for Ethernet Communication on FE 0, and the Canned
Configuration File can be transferred by TFTP.
– Proceed to Table I-7.
Verifying IOS Version and Canned Configuration File TFTP
Transfer to the BTS Router
Prerequisites – The following is required prior to performing this
procedure.:
S A copy of the required MWR 1941 Router IOS Version file is
installed in the Default TFTP Directory. Transfer the file to the LMF
Computer using FTP, Internet Download, or media such as a Zip Disk;
file size is approximately 7–8 MB.
IOS Verification and Canned Configuration File Transfer – Perform
the procedure in Table I-7 to verify that the loaded IOS Version and
transfer the Canned Configuration Files from the LMF Computer to the
BTS Router CF Memory Card..
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-25
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Version
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This Router
model will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.
NOTE
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router
Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router
initialization, operation, and programming information
and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge
Router Software Configuration Guide; part number
78–13983–01.
Have this publication available for reference while
performing this procedure.
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
If Personal Firewall and/or Intrusion Detection Software such as Black ICE is running on the LMF
Computer, shut it down before performing this procedure.
– If this is not done, the TFTP Transfer Process will not operate.
On the LMF Computer, if it has not been done, start the TFTP Server according to the
manufacturer’s directions.
– Refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in the Cellular System Administration –
CDMA OnLine Documentation.
* IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later.
– This Router model will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.
If a HyperTerminal Communication Session with the BTS Router is not running, start one by
performing the procedure in Table I-2.
In the HyperTerminal Window, the BTS Router must be in the Privileged EXEC Mode, as
indicated by a number sign at the end of the prompt:
BTSRTR1#
Ensure that the Ethernet Crossover Cable is connected between the LMF Computer NIC Port and
the BTS Router FE 0 Port.
– Refer to Figure I-4.
table continued on next page
I-26
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
Begin verification that the CF Memory Card contains the correct version of the Cisco IOS by
entering the following command.
dir slot0:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Mar 01 1993 00:11:34
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24879104 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.
– The IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the present Working
Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.
If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to
the default setting.
– If slot0: is included in the command, be sure to include the colon (:) after slot0 when typing
the command.
– The IOS Filename will be similar to the following example.
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-27
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
Direct the BTS Router to show the Version Information by entering the following command.
show version
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
ROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc1)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin”
cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes of
memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
Compare the IOS Filename returned in Step 5 and the second line of the Version Information in
Step 8.
– Note the correspondence between the filename and IOS Version information.
S If the IOS Filename from the CF Memory Card returned in Step 5 is not different than the
filename of the required IOS Version loaded in the LMF Computer Default TFTP Directory,
proceed to Step 11.
S If the IOS Filename from the CF Memory Card returned in Step 5 is different than the filename
of the required IOS Version loaded in the LMF Computer Default TFTP Directory, proceed to
Step 10.
10
Perform the procedure in Table I-13 to load the required version, then proceed to Step 11.
table continued on next page
I-28
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
The File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs that
place the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,
UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).
This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,
that do not list directory contents alphabetically.
11
Verify that the IOS Version is correct.
S If the IOS Version is correct and there is more than one file loaded on the CF Memory Card,
ensure that the IOS File is the first file listed in the Directory Content Display.
S If it is not correct, proceed to Step 12.
12
Prepare the LMF for the correct IOS Version.
12a
Backup all files on the CF Memory Card to the LMF Computer Default TFTP Directory by
performing Step 3 through Step 6 of Table I-13.
12b
Perform Step 25 through Step 30 of Table I-13, as applicable.
12c
Type the following to delete a possible Boot System Line in the startup–config File, pressing
the Enter Key after the command and at each prompt to confirm the filename and deletion
operation.
del nvram:startup–config
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#del nvram:startup–config
Delete filename [startup–config]?
Delete nvram:startup–config? [confirm]
[OK]
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
Ensure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
12d
Verify that the startup–config File size has been reduced to a minimum by entering the
following command.
dir nvram:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir nvram:
Directory of nvram:/
53
54
–rw–
––––
startup–config
private–config
57336 bytes total (57274 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-29
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
13
Action
At the Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following command.
copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config
– Where color = blue or red, as applicable.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []?
14
At the prompt for the Remote Host Address or Name, enter the IP Address of the LMF Computer
NIC:
100.100.100.1
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
15
At the prompt for the Destination Filename, press the Enter Key.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): !
[OK – 2457/4096 bytes]
2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
16
Verify that the Canned Configuration File is saved on the CF Memory Card by entering the dir
Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2457
Mar 01 1993 00:11:34
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24877983 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
17
To allow the BTS Router to boot using the Canned Configuration, enter the following command.
copy canned–config startup–config
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
table continued on next page
I-30
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
18
Action
When prompted for the Destination File Name, press the Enter Key.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2457 bytes copied in 3.52 secs
BTSRTR1#
19
Display and note the file size of the startup–config File by entering the following command.
dir nvram:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of nvram:/
26
27
–rw–
––––
2457
startup–config
private–config
29688 bytes total (24774 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
20
Scroll the HyperTerminal Window back to the slot0: Directory Display obtained in Step 16,
above.
21
Compare the file size of the startup–config File to the Canned Configuration File to verify the
Copy Operation.
– The file sizes should be the same.
22
If desired, the contents of the startup–config File may be verified against the file listings at
the end of this appendix for the blue or red Canned Configuration, as applicable, by entering the
following command.
show startup–config
NOTE
Pressing the Space Bar at the MORE prompt will scroll another full screen of data.
Pressing the Enter Key will scroll the screen one line at a time.
23
Verify that the BTS Router will boot properly on the IOS and revised Start–up
Configuration Files by entering the following command.
reload
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
24
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter Key.
25
When prompted to proceed with Reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-31
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
n Step
26
Action
Verify that the BTS Router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > Prompt or Error Messages
related to Port Configurations.
S If the BTS Router boots to the ROMMON Prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS Router
Boot to ROMMON section of this appendix.
27
Using the tagging materials, tag the BTS Router to clearly identify the installed configuration
[blue (BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)].
28
Remove the CF Memory from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T
Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60) Manual.
29
Mark the installed configuration (blue or red) on the Card Label.
30
Install the card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU
manual (68P09262A60)
31
If an additional BTS Router needs have the Canned Configuration installed, perform the following
actions.
31a
Disconnect the cabling from the BTS Router.
31b
Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.
31c
Repeat the procedures in Table I-5, Table I-6, and this table (Table I-7) using the additional BTS
Router.
32
If no additional BTS Routers must be configured, perform Steps 31a and 31b, then proceed to
Step 33.
33
On the LMF Computer, shut down the TFTP Server Application and exit the HyperTerminal
Session.
34
If no additional TFTP Transfer activities are to be performed, change the NIC IP Address and
Subnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are not
restored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization or
ATP.
I-32
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Method 2: Using a CF Memory
Card Reader to Load CF
Memory Card
Required Equipment and Software
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMF
Computer Platform as specified in this manual.
S One of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File System
CAUTION
BTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S Compact Flash Memory Card Reader Device and Software Driver for
the Operating System installed on the LMF Computer
CAUTION
Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory
devices such as Smart Media Cards will not work with the
CF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers. Do not
attempt to use a Card Reader intended for another type of
memory device.
S Cable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
appendix
S A copy of the MWR 1941 Router IOS Version required for the
network where the BTS Routers are to be installed (Contact the
Network Administrator and the Motorola Account Team for
information on obtaining the required MWR 1941 IOS Version.)
S A +27V DC Power Supply Module to power the BTS Router during
Configuration File Operations.
Required Materials
The following material is required to perform this method:
S Tagging and marking material to identify the BTS Router and CF
Memory Card with the installed configuration (blue or red).
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-33
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Required Publications
The following publications are required to perform procedures in this
section:
S Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
File Operations Using a CF Memory Card Reader
Only File Transfers should be performed using the CF Memory Card
Reader. CF Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTS
Router using a HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CF
Memory Card from a Windows–based computer using a Card Reader
could result in unpredictable BTS Router Operation.
CAUTION
Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using a
Windows–based computer. Only format CF Memory Cards
in a BTS Router.
Verifying IOS Version and Loading BTS Router Canned
Configuration File to CF Memory Card Using a CF Memory
Card Reader
The process of transferring a Canned Configuration File to a BTS Router
using a CF Memory Card Reader consists of the following activities:
1. Transfer the Canned Configuration File to the BTS Router’s CF
Memory Card using a CF Memory Card Reader.
2. Copy the file from the CF Memory Card to the BTS Router’s
startup–config File.
The following procedures are used to accomplish these actions.
Prerequisites
The following is required prior to performing this procedure.:
S A copy of the required MWR 1941 Router IOS Version file is
installed in the Default TFTP Directory (transfer the file to the LMF
Computer using FTP, Internet Download, or media such as a Zip Disk;
file size is approximately 7–8 MB).
Verifying IOS Version and transferring Canned Configuration
File to the BTS Router’s CF Memory Card
IMPORTANT
I-34
MWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Version
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This Router
model will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Transfer the Canned Configuration Files from the LMF Computer to a
BTS Router CF Memory Card by performing the procedure in Table I-8.
Table I-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
If it has not been done, install a CF Memory Card loaded with the IOS in the BTS Router by
performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
* IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 Routers must be loaded with IOS Version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later.
This Router model will not function properly with earlier IOS Versions.
Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router and start a HyperTerminal Communication
Session with the BTS Router by performing the procedure in Table I-2.
If it has not been done, connect the BTS Router to the +27V DC Power Supply Module.
– Make sure that the +27V DC Power Supply Module Output is OFF.
* IMPORTANT
In Step 4, do not touch the computer keyboard until the BTS Router completes the Boot Process.
The BTS Router buffers any keystrokes made during the Boot Process and interprets them as
commands to be executed immediately following Boot Process completion.
Apply power to the BTS Router and allow it to complete the Boot Process.
S If a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter Key and proceed to Step 5:
Press RETURN to get started!
If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter Key:
Basic management set–up configures only enough connectivity
for management of the system, extended set–up will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Would you like to enter basic management set–up? [yes/no]: no
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobin
Router>
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-35
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
Use only a Card Reader specifically designed for CF Memory Cards to perform this procedure.
Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory devices such as Smart Media Cards will
not work with the CF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers.
If it has not been done, follow the CF Memory Card Reader manufacturer’s instructions to load
the CF Memory Card Driver Application for the Operating System being used onto the LMF
Computer.
Connect the CF Memory Card Reader to the LMF Computer following the Card Reader
manufacturer’s instructions.
Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X
SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
Insert the CF Memory Card into the Card Reader as specified by the Card Reader manufacturer’s
instructions.
10
On the LMF Computer, click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
NOTE
The CF Memory Card Reader will appear as a Disk Drive in Windows Explorer with a Disk Drive
Letter and Icon.
11
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the CF Memory Card.
12
Verify that the CF Memory Card contains the required version of the IOS by performing the
following actions.
12a
In the left–hand pane of WindowsExplorer, highlight the CF Memory Card Icon.
12b
In the right–hand pane, note the IOS Filename loaded on the card, and record it.
NOTE
The IOS Filename will be similar to mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin.
13
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the directory where the
Canned Configuration Files that were downloaded from the OMC–R and where the required IOS
Version are stored.
14
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.
15
In the the right–hand pane, locate the filename of the required IOS Version and compare it to the
filename recorded in Step 12b, above.
S If the filenames are different:
– Proceed to Table I-11 to replace the IOS on the CF Memory Card.
– Then, proceed to Step 16, below.
16
In the right–hand pane, highlight the Canned Configuration File to be transferred to the CF
Memory Card and drag it to the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon.
table continued on next page
I-36
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
17
Action
Verify that the Canned Configuration File has been copied to the CF Memory Card by clicking on
the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon in the left–hand pane.
– Verify that the Canned Configuration File appears in the in the right–hand pane.
NOTE
Do not be concerned if the Canned Configuration File appears before the IOS File in the File
Sequence displayed by Windows Explorer.
– The position of the IOS File in the sequence of files on the CF Memory Card can not be
verified until the CF Memory Card is installed in the BTS Router.
18
With the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon still selected, change the name of the Canned
Configuration File on the card to canned–config by performing the following actions.
18a
In the right–hand pane of Windows Explorer, click on the Canned Configuration Filename.
– The filename will be highlighted.
18b
Wait approximately two seconds, and then click on the Canned Configuration File Filename again.
– A hair–line rectangle will appear around the highlighted filename.
18c
After the rectangle appears around the highlighted filename, type the following:
canned–config
18d
Press the Enter Key or click on the Canned Configuration File icon.
– The rectangle around the Canned Configuration Filename will disappear and the filename will
remain highlighted.
19
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
20
Remove the CF Memory Card with the IOS Version and Canned Configuration File from the Card
Reader, and mark the Card Label with the Canned Configuration (blue or red) copied to it.
21
Install the CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T
Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
22
Proceed to Table I-9 to copy the Canned Configuration from the CF Memory Card to the BTS
Router’s startup–config File.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-37
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Copy Canned Configuration File from the CF Memory Card to
the BTS Router’s Start–up Configuration and Verify the IOS
File Sequence
To allow the BTS Router to automatically boot using the Canned
Configuration, the configuration must be copied to the the BTS Router’s
startup–config File in NVRAM. Perform the procedure in Table I-9
to accomplish this..
Table I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and Programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router Initialization, Operation, Programming
Information, and Procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
If it has not been done, install the CF Memory Card with the Canned Configuration and required
IOS Version in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU
manual (68P09262A60).
At this point, the BTS Router should be powered up and displaying the router> Prompt in the
HyperTerminal Window of the LMF Computer Communication Session.
If it is not, perform Step 1 through Step 5 of Table I-8.
At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXEC
Mode:
enable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the present Working Directory
has been changed by using the cd Command.
Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.
– If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return
to the default setting.
table continued on next page
I-38
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
n Step
Action
Display the Directory Listing of the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
dir
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
Ensure that the IOS File is the first file listed in the Directory Content Display.
S If it is not, perform the procedure in Table I-12, and then return to Step 6, below.
Copy the Canned Configuration to the BTS Router’s Start–up Configuration File by entering the
following command.
copy slot0:canned–config startup–config
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#copy slot0:canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
When prompted for the Destination File Name, press the Enter Key.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#copy slot0:canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2218 bytes copied in 3.52 secs
Router1#
Check the file size of the startup–config File to verify the copy operation by entering the
following command.
dir nvram:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of nvram:/
26
27
–rw–
––––
2218
startup–config
private–config
29688 bytes total (25247 bytes free)
Router#
* IMPORTANT
Be sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-39
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
n Step
Action
If desired, the contents of the startup–config File may be verified against the file listings at
the end of this appendix for the blue or red Canned Configuration, as applicable, by entering the
following command.
show startup–config
NOTE
Pressing the Space Bar at the MORE Prompt will scroll to another full screen of data.
Pressing the Enter Key will scroll the screen one line at a time.
10
Verify that the BTS Router will boot properly on the IOS and revised Start–up Configuration Files
by entering the following command.
reload
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
11
If prompted to save a modified configuration:
– Enter n for “no”.
– Press the Enter Key.
12
When prompted to proceed with reload:
– Press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.
13
Verify that the BTS Router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > Prompt or Error Messages
related to Port Configurations.
S If the BTS Router does boot to the ROMMON Prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS
Router Boot to ROMMON section of this appendix.
S If the BTS Router does not boot to the ROMMON Prompt, proceed to Step 14.
14
Using the tagging materials, tag the BTS Router to clearly identify the installed configuration
[blue (BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)].
15
Determine if additional BTS Routers need to be configured.
S If no additional BTS Routers need to be configured, perform Step 16, Step 17, and Step 19 only.
– Do not perform Step 18.
S If any additional BTS Router need to be configured, perform Step 16, Step 17, Step 18, and
Step 19.
16
Disconnect the cabling for the HyperTerminal Communications Session from the BTS Router, and
minimize the HyperTerminal Window on the LMF Computer.
17
Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.
table continued on next page
I-40
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
– continued
Table I-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Start–up
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
n Step
Action
18
Repeat the procedures in Table I-8 and this table (Table I-9) using the additional BTS Router.
19
On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Session.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-41
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Background
BTS Routers are supplied with CF Memory Cards pre–loaded with a
version of the IOS. Prior to installing the BTS Routers in a BTS, the
loaded IOS Version should be verified as being the one required for the
network.
It is critical to also verify that the IOS File is the first file on the CF
Memory Card. If another file precedes the IOS File, the BTS Router will
not boot properly and will not function in the network.
Equipment and Software
Required for Verification
Methods
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMF
Computer Platform as specified in Chapter 3 of this manual:
S One of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File System
CAUTION
BTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S Cable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
appendix
S A copy of the MWR 1941 Router IOS Version required for the
network where the BTS Routers are to be installed.
NOTE
Contact the Network Administrator or the Motorola
Account Team for assistance in determining and obtaining
a copy of the required IOS Version.
S The MWR 1941 will accept a voltage from –60V DC to + 60V DC
during Configuration and File Operations.
Required Publications
The following publication is required to perform procedures in this
section:
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
I-42
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Method 1: Replacement of
Installed Router CF Card IOS
Data
Description
This procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a TFTP
Server Application to perform the following activities::
1. Verify that the IOS Version is loaded on a CF Memory Card and
running on a BTS Router.
2. Replace the IOS Version installed in a BTS Router.
3. Ensure the IOS File is the first file on the CF Memory Card
Additional Required Equipment/Software
For this method, the following Software Application is required in
addition to the common items required for both methods.:
S Cable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)
S A TFTP Server Software Application (refer to the Setting Up the
TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation such as:
– Cisco TFTP Server
– PumpKIN TFTP Server
– Any other equivalent TFTP Server Application
Prerequisites
The following are required prior to performing this procedure::
S The LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for TFTP
File Transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and Steps 1 through 10
of Table I-7.
S A copy of the required IOS Version is loaded into the TFTP Default
Directory of the LMF Computer
Replacing Installed IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence
Position
Perform the procedure in Table I-10 to replace the installed IOS Version
using the TFTP Server Application, and ensure the IOS File is first in
the stored File Sequence on the CF Memory Card..
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-43
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, and
operating as they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and
Steps 1 through 10 of Table I-7.
– If necessary, perform these procedures now.
NOTE
The present IOS Working Directory defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the
present Working Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.
Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.
S If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to
the default setting.
Identify the filename of the currently loaded IOS that must be replaced by entering dir command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051844
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:15:08
Mar 01 1993 00:11:00
mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24878360 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
Begin to back–up the currently installed version of the BTS Router’s IOS to the LMF Computer’s
Default TFTP Directory by entering the following command.
copy old_IOS_filename TFTP:
– Where old_IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS currently loaded on the BTS Router CF
Memory Card.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin TFTP:
Address or name of remote host []?
table continued on next page
I-44
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
At the Remote Host Prompt, enter the following:
100.100.100.1
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin]?
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin]?
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7051844 bytes copied in 109.92 secs (64697 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
If additional files are stored on the CF Memory Card, begin backing them up to the LMF
Computer’s Default TFTP Directory by entering the following command.
copy additional_filename TFTP:
– Where additional_filename = the filename of an additional file loaded on the BTS Router
CF Memory Card.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config TFTP:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [canned–config]?
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-45
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Source filename [canned–config]?
Destination filename [canned–config]?
10
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
11
If more files are stored on the CF Memory Card, repeat Steps 7 through 10 until all files have been
backed up to the LMF Computer.
12
Delete all files from the CF Memory Card by entering the following command:
format slot0:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
13
Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
table continued on next page
I-46
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
14
Action
Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
BTSRTR1#
15
Verify that all files have been deleted from the CF Memory Card by entering the dir Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of slot0:/
No files in directory
31932416 bytes total (31932416 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
16
Begin to copy the required version of the IOS from the LMF Computer to the BTS Router by
entering the following command.
copy TFTP:new_IOS_filename slot0:
– Where new_IOS_filename = the filename of the required IOS for the BTS Router.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
17
If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-47
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
18
Action
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Source filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
19
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]
7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
20
Display the CF Memory Card Directory to verify that the new IOS File is there by entering the dir
command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:25:36
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24880440 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
table continued on next page
I-48
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
21
Action
If any additional files previously stored on the CF Memory Card are to be copied to the card, enter
the following command.
copy TFTP:filename slot0:
– Where filename = the filename of the file to be copied to the CF Memory Card
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:canned–config slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
22
If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default IP Address is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Destination filename [canned–config]?
23
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/canned–config...
Loading basic_config from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
24
After the additional file is copied to the CF Memory Card, display the CF Memory Card Directory
by entering the dir Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
25
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:09:06
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
The IOS File must be the first file listed for the BTS Router to boot properly.
S If it is, proceed to Step 30.
S If it is not, proceed to Step 26.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-49
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
The File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with application programs that
place the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,
UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).
This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,
that do not list directory contents alphabetically.
26
If another file is listed before the IOS File, delete the file by performing Step 12 through Step 14
and display the directory of the CF Memory Card as described in Step 24 to ensure that the file is
deleted.
27
Copy the file from the LMF Computer to the CF Memory Card again by performing Step 21
through Step 24.
28
If the file is again listed before the IOS File in the CF Memory Card Directory Display, format the
CF Memory Card by performing Step 12 through Step 15 of this table.
29
Copy the IOS File and any other required file to the formatted CF Memory Card by performing
Step 16 through Step 25.
30
If additional files are to be transferred to the CF Memory Card, perform Step 21 through Step 25
for each file.
31
After making sure that the IOS File is the first file on the CF Memory Card, restart the BTS
Router with the new IOS Version by entering the following command.
reload
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
32
If prompted to save a modified configuration:
– Enter n for “no”.
– Press the Enter Key.
33
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.
table continued on next page
I-50
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
34
Action
Once the BTS Router has completed rebooting, change to the Privileged EXEC Mode and confirm
that the booted IOS Version is correct by entering the following command.
show version
– A response similar to the following partial example will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
BTSRTR1#
35
Verify that the Version Number displayed in the second line of the Version Information is the
correct IOS Version.
36
If this procedure was entered from Step 10 of Table I-7, return to Table I-7, Step 11.
37
If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform the
following actions.
37a
Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.
37b
Disconnect all other cabling from the BTS Router.
37c
On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.
38
If no additional TFTP Transfer activities are to be performed, change the NIC IP Address and
Subnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are not
restored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization or
ATP.
Method 2: Using a CF Memory
Card Reader for Replacement
of Installed IOS Version and
Changing File Sequence
Position
This subsection contains the File Replacement and File Sequence
Manipulation Procedures to use when transferring files with a CF
Memory Card Reader.
Replace IOS Version Installed on the CF Memory Card
Description – This procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped
with a CF Memory Card Reader to perform the following activities.:
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-51
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
1. Verify that the IOS Version is loaded on a CF Memory Card and
running on a BTS Router.
2. Replace the IOS Version installed in a BTS Router.
3. Ensure that the IOS File is the first file on the CF Memory Card.
Additional Required Equipment/Software – For this method, the
following equipment item and associated software is required in addition
to the common items required for both methods.:
S Compact Flash Memory Card Reader Device and Software Driver for
the Operating System are installed on the LMF Computer.
CAUTION
Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory
devices such as Smart Media Cards will not work with the
CF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers. Do not
attempt to use a Card Reader intended for another type of
memory device.
Prerequisites – The following items are required prior to performing
this procedure.:
S The LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CF
Memory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would be
after performing the procedures in Steps 1 through 10 of Table I-8.
S A copy of the required IOS Version is loaded into the desired directory
of the LMF Computer.
File Operations using a CF Memory Card Reader – Only File
Transfers should be performed using the CF Memory Card Reader. CF
Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTS Router using a
HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CF Memory Card
from a Windows–based computer using a Card Reader could result in
unpredictable BTS Router Operation.
CAUTION
Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using a
Windows–based computer.
– Only format CF Memory Cards in a BTS Router.
Replacing installed IOS Version – Perform the procedure in Table I-11
to replace the installed IOS Version using a CF Memory Card Reader
and to ensure the IOS File is first in the stored File Sequence on the CF
Memory Card.
I-52
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, and
operating as they would be after performing the procedures in Step 1 through Step 15 of Table I-8.
– If necessary, perform these procedures now.
With the CF Memory Card in the CF Memory Card Reader and the Card Reader Icon highlighted
in the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform the following actions to delete the IOS File
from the card:
2a
In the right–hand pane of Windows Explorer, highlight the IOS File to be removed.
2b
Right–click and select Delete from the Pop–up Menu.
! CAUTION
When performing Step 3 and its associated Substeps, files should be moved to and from the CF
Memory Card one by one to reduce the potential for disrupting the the CF Memory Card File
Sequence.
Do not attempt to move multiple files by highlighting, dragging, and dropping all of them at one
time.
If there are more files on the CF Memory Card that must be retained, perform the following
actions.
3a
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the LMF Computer Directory where the
required IOS Version and Canned Configuration Files are stored.
3b
In the right–hand pane, highlight the additional file on the CF Memory Card that is to be retained.
3c
While holding down the Ctrl Key on the LMF Computer, drag and drop the highlighted file into
the directory in the left–hand pane where the required IOS and canned config files are stored.
3d
If additional files loaded on the CF Memory Card must be retained, repeat Step 3b and Step 3c for
each file until all files have been moved from the CF Memory Card to the directory on the LMF
Computer.
When all files on the CF Memory Card have been deleted or moved, as applicable, highlight the
directory in the left–hand pane where the required IOS Version and Canned Configuration Files
are stored.
Verify that all files from the CF Memory Card that must be retained were moved to the directory
by checking the filenames in the right–hand pane.
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the CF Memory Card Reader Icon.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-53
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
In the right–hand pane, highlight the icon for the required version of the IOS.
Drag and drop the IOS Icon to the CF Memory Card Reader Icon to copy it to the CF Memory
Card.
If an additional file in the LMF Computer Directory must be moved to the CF Memory Card,
perform the following:
9a
In the right–hand pane, highlight one additional file that is to be moved to the CF Memory Card.
9b
While holding down the Ctrl Key on the LMF Computer, drag and drop the highlighted file into
the CF Memory Card Reader directory in the left–hand pane.
9c
If additional files in the directory must be placed on the CF Memory Card, repeat Step 9a and
Step 9b for each file until all files have been moved one at a time from the LMF Computer to the
CF Memory Card.
10
In the left–hand pane, highlight the CF Memory Card Reader Icon.
11
Verify that all required files were moved to the CF Memory Card by checking the filenames in the
right–hand pane.
12
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the LMF Computer Directory where the
required IOS Version and Canned Configuration Files are stored.
13
Highlight the directory in the left–hand pane.
14
If this procedure was entered from Step 15 of Table I-8, return to Table I-8, Step 16.
15
If no other File Transfer Activities between the LMF Computer and CF Memory Card are required
at this time, click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
16
Remove the CF Memory Card from the Card Reader and install it in the BTS Router by
performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
17
At this point, the BTS Router should be powered up and displaying the User EXEC Prompt in the
HyperTerminal Window of the LMF Computer Communication Session.
S If it is not, perform Step 1 through Step 5 of Table I-8.
18
At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following command to access the Privileged
EXEC Mode.
enable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
table continued on next page
I-54
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
NOTE
The current IOS Working Directory defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the
present Working Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.
– Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.
S If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the cd slot0: Command to return
to the default setting.
19
Display the Directory Listing of the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
dir
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
! CAUTION
The File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs that
place the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,
UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).
This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,
that do not list directory contents alphabetically.
20
Ensure that the IOS File is the first file listed in the Directory Content Display.
S If it is, proceed to Step 21.
S If it is not,
– Perform the procedure in Table I-12.
– Then, return to Step 21, below.
21
Verify that the BTS Router will boot properly on the IOS and revised Start–up Configuration Files
by entering the following command.
reload
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
22
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter Key.
23
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-55
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
n Step
Action
24
Verify that the BTS Router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > Prompt or Error Messages
related to Port Configurations.
25
If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform the
following actions.
25a
Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.
25b
Disconnect all cabling from the BTS Router.
25c
On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.
Change CF Memory Card File
Sequence to Place IOS File
First on the Card
This procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a CF
Memory Card Reader to perform the following activities.:
1. Change the sequence of files on a CF Memory Card to place the IOS
Version file first.
2. Formatting the CF Memory Card, if necessary, to achieve the
required File Sequence Positioning of the IOS Version File.
Prerequisites
The following are required prior to performing this procedure.:
S The LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CF
Memory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would be
after performing the procedures in Table I-8 and Step 1 through Step 5
of Table I-9.
S Copies of the required IOS Version and Canned Configuration Files
are loaded into the desired directory of the LMF Computer.
Optional equipment/software
If they are available, the following items may be used to change the CF
Memory Card File Sequence once the card is installed in the BTS
Router.:
S Cable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)
I-56
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)
S A TFTP Server Software Application (refer to the Setting Up the
TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation) such as:
– Cisco TFTP Server
– PumpKIN TFTP Server
– Any other equivalent TFTP Server Application
Changing CF Memory Card File Sequence
Perform the procedure in Table I-12 to place the installed IOS Version
file first in the stored File Sequence on the CF Memory Card..
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
The File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs that
place the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,
UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).
This procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, that do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
This procedure assumes that the LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CF
Memory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table I-8 and Steps 1 through 5 of Table I-9.
– If necessary, perform these procedures now.
NOTE
The IOS present Working Directory defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the
present Working Directory has been changed by using the cd Command.
Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd. If the present Working Directory has
been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the default setting.
With the CF Memory Card still installed in the BTS Router, display a CF Memory Card Directory
Listing if one is not showing by entering the dir command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
2212
7051976
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
canned–config
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24878228 bytes free)
Router#
Verify that the IOS File is not the first file on the CF Memory Card.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-57
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
Action
Check if a TFTP Server Application is available on the LMF Computer.
S If a TFTP Server Application is not available, skip to Step 22.
S If a TFTP Server Application is available, connect the Ethernet Crossover Cable as shown in
Figure I-4.
If it has not been done, configure the LMF Computer NIC as directed in Table I-4.
Configure FE Port FE 0 (fa0/0) by performing the following actions.
6a
At the Router> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXEC
Mode:
enable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
6b
At the Router# Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Configure
Submode:
configure terminal
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
table continued on next page
I-58
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
6c
Action
At the Global Configuration Mode Prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing the
Enter Key after each command:
hostname btsrtr1
interface fa0/0
ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
speed 100
duplex full
no shutdown
line con 0
exec–timeout 0 0
no Login
line vty 0 4
no Login
– Responses similar to the following will be displayed:
Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1
BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0
BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100
BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex full
BTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdown
BTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no Login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no Login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#
6d
Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt by
holding down the Ctrl Key and pressing z (Ctrl+z).
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR1#
6e
Verify Port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP Address by entering the following
command.
show ip interface brief
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ip int br
Interface
IP Address
OK?
FastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES
Serial0:0
unassigned
YES
FastEthernet0/1 unassigned
YES
Serial1:0
unassigned
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
administratively down
administratively down
administratively down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
BTSRTR1#
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-59
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
Action
Ensure that the required IOS File and Canned Configuration File for the BTS Router are located in
the TFTP Server Root Directory.
– Refer to Table I-4, Step 14 or Step 17, as applicable.
Delete files from the CF Memory Card by entering the del filename command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
–
Router#del canned–config
Delete filename [canned–config]?
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Delete filename [canned–config]?
Delete slot0:canned–config? [confirm]
10
Press the Enter Key to confirm the deletion.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Delete filename [canned–config]?
Delete slot0:canned–config? [confirm]
Router#
11
Confirm the file deletion by entering the dir command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24887818 bytes free)
Router#
12
Repeat Step 8 through Step 11 for each file until all files have been deleted from the CF Memory
Card.
13
Use the TFTP Server to copy the IOS File from the LMF Computer to the CF Memory Card by
entering the following command.
copy TFTP:IOS_filename slot0:
– Where IOS_filename = required IOS Version filename in the LMF Computer TFTP Server
Root Directory.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host []?
table continued on next page
I-60
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
14
Action
At the prompt for the Remote Host Address or Name, enter the IP Address of the LMF Computer
NIC:
100.100.100.1
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
15
At the prompt for the Destination Filename, press the Enter Key.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]
7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
16
Display the directory of the CF Memory Card to confirm the IOS File Transfer by entering the dir
Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (248880440 bytes free)
Router#
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-61
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
17
Action
Copy the Canned Configuration File to the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config
– Where color = blue or red, as applicable.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
18
If the Default IP Address for the LMF Computer displayed in the prompt is correct, press the
Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is accepted:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
2212 bytes copied in 0.208 secs
Router#
19
At the prompt for the Destination Filename, press the Enter Key.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): !
[OK – 2457/4096 bytes]
2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
20
Determine if the IOS File is now the first file displayed in the Directory Listing by entering the
dir Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24878228 bytes free)
Router#
21
Identify if the IOS File is the first file displayed, as shown in Step 20, above.
S If it is the the first file displayed, proceed to Step 29.
S If it is not the the first file displayed, proceed to Step 22.
table continued on next page
I-62
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
22
Action
Format the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
format slot0:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
23
Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
24
Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
BTSRTR1#
25
If a TFTP Server is available on the LMF Computer, repeat Steps 13 through 21 to transfer the
IOS and Canned Configuration Files to the CF Memory Card.
26
Once the Format Operation is completed, perform the following actions.
26a
Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X
SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
26b
Insert the CF Memory Card in the Card Reader connected to the LMF Computer.
26c
Copy the IOS File to the card by performing Step 4, and Step 6 through Step 11 of Table I-11, as
required.
27
Remove the CF Memory Card from the Card Reader and install it in the BTS Router by
performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-63
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
– continued
Table I-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
n Step
28
Action
Verify that the IOS File is now the first file displayed in the Directory Listing by entering the dir
Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
29
If this procedure was entered from Step 5 of Table I-9, return to Table I-9, Step 6.
30
If this procedure was entered from Step 20 of Table I-11, return to Table I-11, Step 21.
31
If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform the
following actions.
31a
Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.
31b
Disconnect all cabling from the BTS Router.
31c
On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.
32
If a TFTP Server was used in this procedure and no additional TFTP Transfer activities are to be
performed, change the NIC IP Address and Subnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS
Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are not
restored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization or
ATP.
I-64
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
Introduction
BTS Routers are supplied pre–loaded with a version of the ROM
Monitor (ROMMON) Low–level Operating System. Along with the IOS
Version, the loaded ROMMON Version should be verified as being the
one required for the network.
Procedures in this section are used to verify the loaded ROMMON
Version, and, if necessary, change it to the required version. Methods are
provided for using either a TFTP Server or CF Memory Card Reader to
transfer the required ROMMON Version to a BTS Router’s CF Memory
Card.
Equipment and Software
Required for Verification
The following items are required to perform ROMMON Verification:
S A Windows–based computer that meets the requirements of the LMF
Computer Platform as specified in this manual: 1X SC4812T Lite BTS
Optimization/ATP manual (68P09262A58).
S One of the following Operating Systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 File System
CAUTION
BTS Router CF Memory Cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 Versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 File System will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S Cable, Rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this appendix.
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
appendix.
S A copy of the MWR 1941 Router ROMMON Version required for the
network where the BTS Routers are to be installed.
NOTE
Contact the Network Administrator or the Motorola
Account Team for assistance in determining and obtaining
a copy of the required ROMMON Version.
S A +27V DC Power Supply Module to power the BTS Router during
Configuration File Operations.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-65
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Required Publications
The following publication is required to perform procedures in this
section:
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
Method 1: In–Router
Verification and Replacement
of Installed ROMMON Version
Description
This procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a TFTP
Server Application to perform the following activities.:
1. Verify that the ROMMON Version loaded and running on a BTS
Router
2. Replace the ROMMON Version installed in a BTS Router
Additional Required Equipment/Software
For this method, the following equipment and Software Application is
required in addition to the common items required for both methods.:
S Cable, Ethernet Crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact Modular Plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola Part Number 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola Part Number 3088643C09)
S A TFTP Server Software Application; refer to the Setting Up the
TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation such as:
– Cisco TFTP Server
– PumpKIN TFTP Server
– Any other equivalent TFTP Server Application
Prerequisites
The following items are required prior to performing this procedure.:
S The LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for TFTP
File Transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and Steps 1 through 10
of Table I-7.
S A copy of the required ROMMON Version is loaded into the TFTP
Default Directory of the LMF Computer.
Verifying and replacing installed ROMMON Version
Perform the procedure in Table I-13 to verify and, if necessary, replace
the installed ROMMON Version using the TFTP Server Application..
I-66
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, and
operating as they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and
Steps 1 through 4 of Table I-7.
– If necessary, perform these procedures now.
Identify the installed ROMMON Version from the BTS Router Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt:
show version
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
ROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc3)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”
cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes of
memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-67
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
To identify the currently installed ROMMON Version, examine the ROM: system bootstrap
Line in the response.
Compare the installed ROMMON Version information with the Filename of the ROMMON
Version required for the network.
NOTE
1. The ROMMON Filename Format is similar to the following:
MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
2. The ROMMON Filename reflects the Version Number of the software (122–8r.MC3).
If the installed version is the one required for the network, skip to Step 26.
If the installed ROMMON Version is not the one required for the network, back–up the current
BTS Router Configuration to the LMF Computer by entering the following command.
copy nvram:startup–config TFTP
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy nvram:start TFTP
Address or name of remote host []?
NOTE
Ensure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
At the prompt for the Remote Host Address or Name, enter the IP Address of the LMF Computer
NIC:
100.100.100.1
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy copy nvram:start TFTP
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Source filename [startup–config]?
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Source filename [startup–config]?
Destination filename [startup–config]?
table continued on next page
I-68
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP Server
n Step
Action
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) Directory unless the present Working Directory
has been changed by using the cd Command.
– Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd.
– If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return
to the default setting.
10
Determine the amount of memory available (bytes free) on the CF Memory Card by entering the
dir command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
11
Verify that there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.
NOTE
A ROMMON Version File requires approximately 0.7 MB.
12
Begin to copy the required version of the ROMMON File from the LMF Computer to the BTS
Router by entering the following command.
copy TFTP:new_rommon_filename slot0:
– Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMMON Version for the
BTS Router.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy TFTP:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-69
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP Server
n Step
13
Action
If the Default IP Address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP Address for the LMF Computer.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
14
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Source filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Destination filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
15
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Destination filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Accessing TFTP://100.100.100.1/MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin...
Loading MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!
Loading MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK – 614306/14103552 bytes]
614306 bytes copied in 13.059 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
16
Display the CF Memory Card Directory to verify that the new ROMMON Version File is there by
entering the dir Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
614306
Sep 23 2002 07:25:36
Mar 01 1993 00:09:06
Dec 13 2002 14:59:36
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
31932416 bytes total (24263922 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
17
Replace the existing ROMMON Version with the new one copied to the CF Memory Card by
entering the following command.
upgrade rom–monitor file slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#This command will reload the BTS Router. Continue?[yes/no]
table continued on next page
I-70
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP Server
n Step
18
Action
When prompted to continue, enter yes and press the Enter Key.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#This command will reload the BTS Router. Continue?[yes/no] yes
ROMMON image upgrade in progress
Erasing boot flash
eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Programming boot flash pppp
Now reloading
19
When the BTS Router has completed Initialization, change to the BTS Router Privileged EXEC
Mode by entering the following command.
enable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1>enable
BTSRTR1#
20
Verify that the BTS Router has initialized with the new ROMMON Version by entering the
following command.
show version
– A response similar to the following partial response will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(8r)MC3 RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
21
Compare the version displayed in the response ROM: System Bootstrap Line to the filename of
the new ROMMON Version File copied to the CF Memory Card.
22
If the BTS Router successfully rebooted with the new ROMMON Version, the ROMMON File
can be deleted from the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
delete slot0:new_rommon_filename
– Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMMON Version copied to
the CF Memory Card in Steps 12 through 15, above.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#del slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-71
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-13: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a TFTP Server
n Step
23
Action
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Delete slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]
24
Press the Enter Key to confirm the deletion.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed if the Default Filename is selected:
Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Delete slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]
BTSRTR1#
! CAUTION
In Step 25, do not delete the IOS and canned–config files from the CF Memory Card.
– The BTS Router must have these files on the card to properly boot or switch between Packet
and Circuit Mode.
25
If additional unnecessary files, such as a back–up of the startup–config File, are also on the
CF Memory Card, delete them by repeating Step 22 through Step 24 for each file.
26
If no other BTS Router File Operations or Configuration Actions are required, perform the
following actions.
26a
Remove power from the BTS Router and disconnect it from the Power Supply Module.
26b
Disconnect all cabling from the BTS Router.
26c
On the LMF Computer, exit the HyperTerminal Communications Session.
27
If no additional TFTP Transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP Address and
Subnet Mask back to those for LMF–BTS Communication recorded in Table I-4, Step 9b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask for the LMF Computer’s NIC are not
restored, the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS Optimization or
ATP.
Method 2: Verification and
Replacement of Installed
ROMMON Version Using a CF
Memory Card Reader
Description
This procedure covers using an LMF Computer equipped with a CF
Memory Card Reader to perform the following activities.:
1. Verify the ROMMON Version loaded and running on a BTS Router.
2. Replace the ROMMON Version installed in a BTS Router.
I-72
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Additional Required Equipment/Software
For this method, the following equipment item and associated software
is required in addition to the common items required for both methods.:
S CF Memory Card Reader Device and Software Driver for the
Operating System installed on the LMF Computer.
CAUTION
Card Readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory
devices such as Smart Media Cards will not work with the
CF Memory Cards used in the MWR 1941 Routers. Do not
attempt to use a Card Reader intended for another type of
memory device.
Prerequisites
The following items are required prior to performing this procedure.:
S The LMF Computer and BTS Router have been prepared for CF
Memory Card Reader File Transfer and are operating as they would be
after performing the procedures in Step 1 through Step 10 of Table I-8.
S A copy of the required ROMMON Version is loaded into the desired
directory of the LMF Computer.
File Operations using a CF Memory Card Reader
Only File Transfers should be performed using the CF Memory Card
Reader. CF Memory Card Formatting should be performed in a BTS
Router using a HyperTerminal Connection. Attempting to format a CF
Memory Card from a Windows–based computer using a Card Reader
could result in unpredictable BTS Router Operation..
CAUTION
Do not format BTS Router CF Memory Cards using a
Windows–based computer. Only format CF Memory Cards
in a BTS Router.
Verifying and replacing installed ROMMON Version
Perform the procedure in Table I-14 to verify and, if necessary replace
the installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card Reader..
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-73
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF Computer and BTS Router are configured, connected, and
operating as they would be after performing the procedures in Step 1 through Step 10 of Table I-8.
– If necessary, perform these procedures now.
Determine the currently installed ROMMON Version by entering the following at the BTS Router
Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt:
show version
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
ROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc3)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”
cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes of
memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
table continued on next page
I-74
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
Action
To determine the currently installed ROMMON Version, examine the ROM: System Bootstrap
Line in the response.
Compare the installed ROMMON Version Information with the Filename of the ROMMON
Version required for the network.
NOTE
1. The ROMMON Filename Format is similar to the following:
MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
2. The ROMMON Filename reflects the Version Number of the software (122–8r.MC3).
If the installed version is the one required for the network, skip to Step 26.
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF Memory Card (slot0:) directory unless the present Working Directory
has been changed by using the cd Command.
– Identify the present Working Directory by entering pwd .
S If the present Working Directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to
the default setting.
If the installed ROMMON Version is not the one required for the network, determine the amount
of memory available (bytes free) on the CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
dir
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
Ensure that there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.
NOTE
A ROMMON Version File requires approximately 0.7 MB, and space must also be available for a
back–up of the BTS Router’s startup–config File.
Create a back–up of the current BTS Router Configuration on the CF Memory Card by entering
the following command.
copy nvram:startup–config slot:0
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy nvram:startup–config slot0:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-75
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
10
Action
If the Default Filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter Key to accept it.
S If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2212 bytes copied in 4.96 secs (553 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
11
Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X
SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
12
Insert the CF Memory Card into the Card Reader as specified by the Card Reader manufacturer’s
instructions.
13
On the LMF Computer, click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
NOTE
The CF Memory Card Reader will appear as a Disk Drive in Windows Explorer with a Disk Drive
letter and icon.
14
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the CF Memory Card.
15
In the left–hand pane of WindowsExplorer, highlight the CF Memory Card Icon.
16
In the right–hand pane, verify that the files displayed in Step 6, above, appear.
17
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the directory where the
required ROMMON Version File is stored.
18
In the right–hand pane, perform the following actions.
18a
Highlight the startup–config File on the CF Memory Card.
NOTE
After highlighting the startup–config File in the right–hand pane, it may be necessary to scroll
the left–hand pane to see the Directory Icon where the required ROMMON Version File is stored
before dragging the file.
18b
Note its file size.
18c
Drag it to the icon for the directory where the required ROMMON Version File is stored.
19
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the required ROMMON Version File is stored.
20
In the right–hand pane, verify that the startup–config File is in the directory, and the file size
is the same as the original on the CF Memory Card.
table continued on next page
I-76
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Verify and Upgrade ROMMON Version
– continued
Table I-14: Verify and Replace the Installed ROMMON Version using a CF Memory Card Reader
n Step
21
Action
In the right–hand pane, highlight the required ROMMON Version File to be transferred to the CF
Memory Card and drag it to the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon.
NOTE
After highlighting the ROMMON Version File in the right–hand pane, it may be necessary to
scroll the left–hand pane to see the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon before dragging the file.
22
Verify that the ROMMON Version File has been copied to the CF Memory Card by clicking on
the CF Memory Card Disk Drive Icon in the left–hand pane, and being sure that the ROMMON
Version File appears in the in the right–hand pane.
23
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
24
Remove the CF Memory Card with the ROMMON Version File from the Card Reader.
25
Install the CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X SC4812T
Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
26
Proceed to Replace Installed ROMMON Version, below.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-77
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
Introduction
ROM Monitor Boot Conditions
Under certain circumstances the BTS Router will initialize with the
ROM Monitor (ROMMON) Operating System rather than the IOS.
These circumstances include:
IOS File is missing from the CF Memory Card
IOS File is not the first file on the CF Memory Card
IOS File image on the CF Memory Card is corrupt
Start–up–config File contains an outdated Boot System Line
specifying an IOS File that has been replaced with an updated version
S Start–up–config file contains Boot System Line with typographical
error(s) in the IOS Filename
Description
Router Operation on ROMMON is signalled by the display of the
rommon # > Prompt, where # is a number that increments each time a
command is issued. ROMMON is a low–level Operating System that
provides limited capabilities for Router testing and troubleshooting
operations, but does not support any operations on files beyond viewing
directory contents or booting from a specified file. As a result, files can
not be copied or deleted when the BTS Router is operating on
ROMMON.
Recovery Methods
Two recovery methods are included in this section.
1. The first is the simplest and requires that a valid, uncorrupted IOS
Version is installed on the CF Memory Card.
2. The second method requires additional equipment and must be used
in instances such as when an IOS File is not installed on the CF
Memory Card or the installed IOS Image is corrupted..
Simple Recovery from Boot to
ROMMON
Requirements
Unless it is certain, that the IOS Image on the CF Memory Card is
corrupted, this method should always be the first attempted to recover
the BTS Router from a ROMMON Initialization.
– This method does not require any additional equipment beyond the
items necessary to load Canned Configuration Files into the BTS
Router.
– To be effective, this method does require that a valid, uncorrupted
IOS Image file is installed on the BTS Router’s CF Memory Card..
I-78
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Recovery
Perform the procedure in Table I-15 to attempt a simple recovery from a
BTS Router ROMMON Initialization..
Table I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF Computer is set–up and connected to the BTS Router with an
active HyperTerminal Communication Session.
– If it is not, perform the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a HyperTerminal Communication
Session.
With the rommon 1 > Prompt displayed in the HyperTerminal Window, enter the following
command to identify the IOS File on the CF Memory Card:
dir slot0:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 1 > dir slot0:
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
Directory of slot0:
2212
–rw–
canned–config
7051976
–rw–
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
rommon 2 >
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-79
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Table I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
Note the IOS Filename, and enter the following command to begin recovery to an IOS Boot:
boot slot0:IOS_filename
– Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in Step 2, above.
– A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response that begins and ends
similar to the following:
rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99ac
Self decompressing the image :
################################################################### [OK]
Smart Init is enabled
smart init is sizing iomem
ID
00031A
MEMORY_REQ
TYPE
0X005F3C00 MWR1941 Mainboard
0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools
0X00211000 public particle pools
TOTAL:
0X008F87B0
Press RETURN to get started!
S If the BTS Router successfully reboots with the IOS, proceed to Step 7.
S If the BTS Router does not reboot with the IOS, proceed to Step 4
Scroll the HyperTerminal Display down until the Directory Display from Step 2, above, is visible.
Compare the IOS Filename from the Directory Display with the filename entered in performing
Step 3, above.
S If the filename was typed incorrectly, repeat Step 3, using care to type the filename correctly.
If the BTS Router does not reboot with the IOS after typing the filename correctly, proceed to
Table I-16 and perform the Extended Recovery Procedure.
table continued on next page
I-80
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Table I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
The File Sequence on the CF Memory Card can not be verified with Application Programs that
place the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain UNIX Telnet Applications,
UNIX Directory Listing Commands, and Windows File Managers such as Windows Explorer).
This portion of the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal,
that do not list directory contents alphabetically.
After a successful reboot with IOS, perform the following actions to correct the cause of the boot
to ROMMON:
7a
Enter the dir slot0: Command to display the CF Memory Card Directory, and, if the IOS File is
not the first file listed, perform the procedure in Table I-10, Steps 26 through 33, or Table I-12, as
applicable, to correct the situation.
7b
If the IOS File is the first file, enter the following Command to display the contents of the
startup–config File:
show startup–config
A response that begins similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh start
Using 1589 out of 57336 bytes
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
boot system slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.07132002.bin
no logging console
username cisco password 0 cisco
Redundancy
mode y–cable
standalone
7c
If the file listing contains a “Boot System” Line, examine it for the correct IOS Filename.
7d
If the Boot System slot0: Filename is incorrect, enter the following, using care to type the
filename correctly:
boot system slot0:IOS_filename
– Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in Step 2, above.
7e
Replace the Boot System Line in the startup–config File with the line entered in Step 7d,
above, by entering the following command.
copy runing–config startup–config
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-81
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Table I-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
7f
Action
Verify that the correct IOS Filename is now included in the listing by entering the following
command.
show startup–config
– A response that begins similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh start
Using 1589 out of 57336 bytes
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
boot system slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
no logging console
username cisco password 0 cisco
Redundancy
mode y–cable
standalone
7g
If the filename is correctly written, enter the following to determine if the BTS Router will reboot
to IOS:
reload
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter Key.
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter Key to continue the Reload Operation.
10
After a successful reboot with IOS, proceed with other BTS Router activities or remove power
from the BTS Router and disconnect it.
11
If the BTS Router still will not successfully boot with IOS, proceed to Table I-16 and perform the
Extended Recovery Procedure.
I-82
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Extended Recovery from Boot
to ROMMON
Requirements
If ROMMON Boot Recovery Attempts fail using the simple recovery
method, this method must be used to reboot a BTS Router that has
initialized with ROMMON. This method requires additional equipment
beyond the items necessary to load Canned Configuration Files into the
BTS Router. Extended recovery requires formatting the CF Memory
Card from the ROMMON–initialized Router and reloading the
reformatted CF Memory Card with the required IOS Version..
Additional Equipment Required
An additional, formatted, 32 MB CF Memory Card with the required
version of the IOS installed is required in addition to the equipment and
software required for BTS Router Canned Configuration Installation.
This Card may be::
S A spare CF Memory Card that is loaded with the required IOS
Version.
S A CF Memory Card from an additional BTS Router that is loaded
with the required IOS Version.
Recovery
Perform the procedure in Table I-15 to perform an Extended Recovery
from a BTS Router ROMMON Initialization..
Table I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
This procedure assumes the BTS Router is powered and operating on ROMMON with the LMF
Computer Set–up and connected to the BTS Router with an active HyperTerminal Communication
Session.
S If it is not, perform the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a HyperTerminal Communication
Session.
Remove the CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X
SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
Install the additional CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X
SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-83
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Table I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
Enter the following to obtain the filename of the IOS Version loaded on the CF Memory Card:
dir slot0:
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 1 > dir slot0:
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
Directory of slot0:
7051976
–rw–
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
rommon 2 >
Note the exact filename displayed for the IOS Version.
table continued on next page
I-84
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Table I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
Enter the following command to initialize the BTS Router with the IOS on the additional CF
Memory Card.
boot slot0:IOS_filename
– Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in Step 5, above.
– A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response that begins and ends
similar to the following:
rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99ac
Self decompressing the image :
################################################################### [OK]
Smart Init is enabled
smart init is sizing iomem
ID
MEMORY_REQ
00031A
TYPE
0X005F3C00 MWR1941 Mainboard
0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools
0X00211000 public particle pools
TOTAL:
0X008F87B0
––– System Configuration Dialog –––
Would you like to enter the Initial Configuration dialog? [yes/no]: n
S If the BTS Router Prompts with a question to enter the initial dialog as shown in Step 6, above,
type no and press the Enter Key to obtain the User EXEC Mode Prompt.
S If the BTS Router Prompts with Press RETURN to get started!, press the Enter Key to
obtain the User EXEC Mode Prompt.
At the User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged EXEC Mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router> enable
Router#
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-85
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMMON
– continued
Table I-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMMON Boot
n Step
Action
Remove the additional CF Memory Card from the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the
1X SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
Install the original CF Memory Card in the BTS Router by performing the procedure in the 1X
SC4812T Lite BTS FRU manual (68P09262A60).
10
Format the original CF Memory Card by entering the following command.
format slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
11
Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation. A response similar to the following will
be displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
12
Press the Enter Key to continue the Format Operation. A response similar to the following will
be displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
Router#
13
Copy the required IOS Version to the formatted original CF Memory Card by performing one of
the following:
S Use the LMF Computer and a TFTP Server performing the procedure in Table I-10
S Use the LMF Computer and a CF Memory Card Reader performing the procedure in Table I-11
14
If applicable, perform IOS initialization troubleshooting as described in Table I-15, Steps 7
through 10.
I-86
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
Entering or Changing Router
FE Interface IP Address
It may be necessary to enter or change the IP Addresses and/or operating
parameters for BTS Router FE Interfaces FE 0 and FE1 without making
other changes in the BTS Router Configuration Files. Procedures in this
section cover these operations.
Prerequisites
The following must be accomplished before entering or changing BTS
Router FE port IP Addresses and/or operating parameters:
S The user has read and understands the content of MWR1941 Wireless
Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number
78–13983–01.
S BTS Routers must have the required version of the IOS saved on their
installed CF Memory Card.
S BTS Routers must have power applied, be operating without alarms
other than Span Alarms, and have completed Boot–up to the User
EXEC Mode Prompt (BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>).
S The BTS Router Privileged EXEC Mode Password has been obtained
from the Network Administrator.
Entering or Changing FE
Interface IP Addresses
To enter or change FE Interface IP Addresses, perform the procedure in
Table I-17.
Table I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
n Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS Router Operation and programming.
Before performing this procedure, review BTS Router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01.
– Have this publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
Obtain the correct IP Addresses and Subnet Masks for the BTS Router FE Interfaces from the
Network Administrator.
If a HyperTerminal Connection for BTS Card/Module MMI or BTS Router (BTSRTR)
communication has not been created, create one as described in Table I-1 of this appendix.
Connect the LMF Computer to the BTS Router, and start a Communication Session as described
in Table I-2 in this appendix.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-87
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
Table I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
n Step
Action
NOTE
Examples in this procedure show Prompts for BTSRTR–bts#–1–1 and BTSRTR–bts#–1–2, but
the procedure can be used for any Router in any BTS Router Group or a BTS Router running the
Canned Configuration File (BTSRTR1 or BTSRTR2).
At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> User EXEC Mode Prompt, enter the following to access the Privileged
EXEC Mode:
enable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enable
Password:
Enter the Privileged EXEC Mode Password.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enable
Password:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Privileged EXEC Mode Prompt, display the FE Interface IP Addresses
by typing:
show ip interface brief
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# show ip interface brief
Interface
IP Address
OK?
Method
Status
Protocol
FastEthernet0/0
192.168.146.1 YES
NVRAM
up
up
Serial0:0
unassigned
YES
unset
administratively down
down
FastEthernet0/1
unassigned
YES
unset
administratively down
down
Serial1:0
unassigned
YES
unset
administratively down
down
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
For a FastEthernet0/0 (fa0/0) or FastEthernet0/1(fa0/1) Interface that does not have a correct IP
Address, or does not have an assigned IP Address, enter the following at the BTS Router Prompt
to access the Global Configuration Mode:
configure terminal
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
table continued on next page
I-88
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
Table I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
n Step
Action
At the Global Configure Mode Prompt, enter the following command to access the Configure
Interface Submode for the interface requiring IP Address assignment/change:
interface fastethernetinterface#
– Where interface# = 0/0 or 0/1, as applicable.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)# int fa0/1
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
At the Configure Interface Submode Prompt, assign or change the interface IP Address by
entering the following command.
ip address IP_addr Subnet_mask
– Where:
IP_addr = the required IP Address for the interface; for example, 192.168.147.1
Subnet_mask = the required Subnet Mask for the interface; for example, 255.255.255.0
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ip address
192.168.147.1
255.255.255.0
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
10
To complete configuration of the interface, enter the following Parameter Settings, one at a time,
pressing Enter after each:
duplex full
speed 100
keepalive 1
no shutdown
11
Return to the Global Configuration Mode by entering the exit Command.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# exit
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
12
If the IP Address and/or Parameters for the other FE Interface on the BTS Router need to be
assigned or changed at this time, repeat Step 8 through Step 11 for the other FE Interface.
table continued on next page
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-89
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
Table I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
n Step
13
Action
Once the correct parameters have been set for all FE Interfaces, return to the Privileged EXEC
Mode Prompt by holding down the Ctrl Key and pressing z (Ctrl +z).
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
NOTE
Entering exit twice, pressing the Enter Key after each entry, will also complete the Interface
Configuration and return the BTS Router to the Privileged EXEC Mode.
14
Save the Interface Configuration changes to the Start–up Configuration File on the CF Memory
Card by entering the following command.
copy running–config startup–config
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
15
copy run start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
Press Enter.
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run start
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?
Building configuration...
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK]
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
16
If all FE IP Address Entries/Changes for the BTS Router are complete, enter the following to
return the BTS Router to user EXEC Mode:
disable
– A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>
17
disable
Determine if any other Router requires the FE Interfaces to be assigned/changed.
S If no other Router requires the FE Interfaces to be assigned/changed, proceed to Step 20.
If FE Interfaces on another Router must be assigned/changed, proceed to Step 18.
18
Disconnect the 8–contact Modular Plug from the current Router CONSOLE Port and connect it to the
CONSOLE Port of the other Router.
table continued on next page
I-90
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
Table I-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
n Step
Action
19
Press the Enter Key, and when the BTS Router User EXEC Mode Prompt appears, repeat Step 3
through Step 16 for the other Router.
20
When the BTS Router is in User EXEC Mode, close the HyperTerminal Session and disconnect
the LMF Computer and additional components from the BTS Router.
BTS Router Canned
Configuration File
This section presents listings of the blue and red Router Canned
Configuration File contents for the MWR 1941 BTS Routers. The blue
Router is the primary Router on the BTS LAN Subnet 192.168.146.0,
and the red Router is the primary on BTS LAN Subnet 192.168.147.0.
The Canned Configuration Files allow communication with the BTS
Routers for both on–site FE Cabling Connectivity Verification and for
downloading the BTS Routers from the network with the full,
site–specific Operational Configuration.
Obtaining the Latest
Configuration File Content
The files included here are for example only. The correct Canned
Configuration File Content for each BTS Router should be generated at
the OMC–R by using the /screl/active/bin/gen_btsrtr_canned_config.ksh
Script.
Configuration File Examples
Examples of both Configuration Files are provided in the following
subsections.
“Blue” BTS Router Canned
Configuration
! Canned Config file for BTSRTR1
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
no logging console
ip Subnet–zero
ip classless
ip pim bidir–enable
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-91
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
disable–eadi
Redundancy
mode y–cable
standby use–interface Loopback101 health
standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive
standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaul
interface loopback 101
description BTSRTR health loopback
no ip address
interface loopback 102
description BTSRTR revertive loopback
no ip address
! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK
controller T1 0/0
description 1st Span on BTSRTR
framing esf
linecode b8zs
cablelength short 133
Clock Source line
channel–group 0 Timeslots 1–24 speed 64
! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.
! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebooted
interface Multilink 1
ip address negotiated
no ip route–cache
no cdp enable
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Set–up Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time
interface Serial0/0:0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
keepalive 1
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Set–up Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them
interface FastEthernet0/0
ip address 192.168.146.1 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 1 timers 1 3
standby 1 preempt
standby 1 priority 100
standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3
standby 1 name one
standby 1 track Fa0/1 10
standby 1 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
I-92
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
standby 1 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 1 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 2 timers 1 3
standby 2 preempt
standby 2 priority 100
standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3
standby 2 name two
standby 2 track Fa0/0 10
standby 2 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 2 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 2 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1
line con 0
exec–timeout 15 0
password cisco
line aux 0
Login
password cisco
line vty 0 4
Login
password cisco
end
“Red” BTS Router Canned
Configuration
! Canned Config file for BTSRTR2
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR2
no logging console
ip Subnet–zero
ip classless
ip pim bidir–enable
disable–eadi
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-93
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
Redundancy
mode y–cable
standby use–interface Loopback101 health
standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive
standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaul
interface loopback 101
description BTSRTR health loopback
no ip address
interface loopback 102
description BTSRTR revertive loopback
no ip address
! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK
controller T1 0/0
description 1st Span on BTSRTR
framing esf
linecode b8zs
cablelength short 133
Clock Source line
channel–group 0 Timeslots 1–24 speed 64
! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.
! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebooted
interface Multilink 1
ip address negotiated
no ip route–cache
no cdp enable
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Set–up Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time
interface Serial0/0:0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
keepalive 1
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Set–up Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them
interface FastEthernet0/0
ip address 192.168.146.2 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 1 timers 1 3
standby 1 preempt
standby 1 priority 100
standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3
standby 1 name one
standby 1 track Fa0/1 10
standby 1 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 1 track Loopback101 10
I-94
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
– continued
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 1 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 192.168.147.2 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 2 timers 1 3
standby 2 preempt
standby 2 priority 100
standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3
standby 2 name two
standby 2 track Fa0/0 10
standby 2 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 2 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 2 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1
line con 0
exec–timeout 15 0
password cisco
line aux 0
Login
password cisco
line vty 0 4
Login
password cisco
end
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-95
Preparation for Site Turn–over
Preparation for Site Turn–over
Prepare the BTS Site for turn–over to the control of the OMC–R by
performing the procedures in Table I-18 and Table I-19.
Table I-18: Prepare for Site Turn–over
n Step
Action
After disconnecting it from the BTS Router, shut down the LMF Computer.
If any additional external support equipment was used during the Installation Process, shut it down
and disconnect it from the frame.
Account for all tools used and parts removed from the frame during the installation, being sure
none were left inside the frame.
Visually inspect the frame for any foreign objects left inside, and remove any discovered.
Visually inspect all Cable Connections, ensuring they are connected as required for normal BTS
Operation.
Ensure all Internal Frame Cables are routed and secured to prevent damage to them when the
Cabinet Doors are closed.
Ensure all External Frame and BTS Router Cables are routed and secured so they will not interfere
with normal Maintenance and Operational Activities at the site.
Ensure that the BTS Routers are powered up and not reporting alarms other than Span Alarms.
Returning the Site to OMC–R
Control
Perform the procedure in Table I-19 to return the site to OMC–R
Control.
Table I-19: Returning the Site to Operational Control
n Step
I-96
Action
Contact the OMC–R, and notify the operator that the installation is complete.
Request notification from the operator when the BTS Routers have been downloaded with the full
site–specific Configurations and are verified as functioning normally.
When notified that Router operation has been verified and the OMC–R can assume control of the
site, perform the following actions.
3a
On any frames that were opened, close and secure the Cabinet Doors.
3b
Verify that no Alarm Conditions are being reported to the OMC–R with the Cabinet Doors closed.
3c
Prepare all equipment, tools, and parts removed from the frame for transport from the site.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Preparation for Site Turn–over
– continued
What to Do Next
The installation of the Packet Backhaul Option is complete. When the
site is secured, there are no further actions to perform at the BTS Site.
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
I-97
Index
Numbers
10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional test equipment,
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-139
All Cal/Audit procedure, 3-119
All RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-9
1-11
All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,
RFDS, 6-29
All TX ATP Test Procedure, 4-8
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-7
10BaseT/10Base2 converter, LMF to BTS
connection, 3-18
All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-6
2–way splitter, optional test equipment, 1-11
Abbreviated
RX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-6
TX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-6
Acceptance Test Procedure. See ATP
ACTIVE LED
GLI, 6-33
MCC–8/24 Card, 6-37
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address,
F-8
Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB
Address, F-14
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address,
F-9
Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test
Set GPIB Address, F-10
Agilent E4406A, calibration, F-30
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address,
F-5
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address, F-7
Alarm Connector Location/Pin, 3-137
ATP
all inclusive TX acceptance test outline, 4-6
automated introduction, 4-1
code domain noise floor acceptance test procedure,
4-21
code domain power acceptance test procedure, 4-21
failure report generation, 4-25
FER test, frame error rate testing, 4-24
pilot time offset, 4-18
prerequisites, 4-2
spectral purity TX mask, 4-14
test matrix/detailed optimization, C-1
test set–up, 3-68 , 3-88
Advantest R3267/R3562
DRDCs, 3-71 , 3-91
TRDCs, 3-73 , 3-93
Advantest R3465, 3-68 , 3-88
Agilent 8935, DRDCs, 3-68 , 3-88
Agilent 8935/E4432B, DRDCs, 3-70 , 3-72 , 3-90
, 3-92
Agilent E4406A/E4432B
DRDCs, 3-70 , 3-90
TRDCs, 3-72 , 3-92
CyberTest, 3-68 , 3-88
HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, 3-69 , 3-89
HP 8921A, 800 MHz, 3-69 , 3-89
waveform quality (Rho), 4-16
waveform quality (RHO) acceptance test procedure,
4-16
ALARM LED, GLI, 6-34
ATP – Reduced, 4-1
Alarm Monitor window, 3-139
Attenuator, required test equipment, 1-9
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Index-1
Index
– continued
Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1
Bay Level Offset calibration
description, 3-109
Index-2
purpose, 3-109
when to calibrate, 3-110
Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-11
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Index
– continued
BBX
Adding, 3-48–3-50
Prerequisites, 3-48–3-50
Logical data, 4-79–4-81
CAL file. See calibration data file
Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator &
Spectrum Analyzer, 3-104
BBX
carrier spectral purity, 4-13
gain set point vs SIF output considerations, D-1
primary and redundant, TX tests to be performed,
4-11
Calibrating, Test Equipment, 3-100
Calibrating Cables, Overview, 3-101
Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface
HP83236B, F-35
BBX LED status combinations, 6-36
Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications
System Analyzer, 3-102
BBX2 Connector, 6-22
Calibration, In–Service, H-23
BLO. See Bay Level Offset calibration
calibration
calibration data file, 3-111
Gigatronics 8542B, F-33
Broad Band Receiver. See BBX
BTS
download, 3-36
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-33
LMF connection, 3-17 , 3-18
RX sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-12
system software download, 3-4
Calibration Audit failure, 6-12
BTS frame, initial power–up, 2-12
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-9
BTS Frame Erasure Rate. See FER
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-9
BTS Log In Procedure, GUI, 3-26
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2
BTS login
CLI environment, 3-29
General, 3-25
GUI environment, 3-26
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-18
BTS Logout
CLI environment, 3-31
GUI environment, 3-30
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-17
calibration data file, description of, 3-111
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-6
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-5
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-17
BTS router communication session, establishing, I-5
CDF, 3-4
site equipage verification, 3-5
site type and equipage data information, 2-1
BTS router connections
FE verification, I-6
programming, I-6
CDI Alarm
with Alarms Test Box, 3-140
without Alarms Test Box, 3-144
Create CAL File, 3-125
CDMA
allocation diagram for the North American, cellular
telephone frequency spectrum, E-4
optimization/ATP test matrix, C-1
subscriber mobile radiotelephone, optional test
equipment, 1-11
cable calibration, automatic, test set–up, 3-60 , 3-61 ,
3-80 , 3-81
Advantest R3267/R3562, 3-61 , 3-81
Advantest R3465, 3-60 , 3-80
Agilent 8935, 3-60 , 3-80
Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-61 , 3-62 , 3-81 , 3-82
CyberTest, 3-60 , 3-80
HP 8921A, 3-60 , 3-80
FEB 2005
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-1
types configuration, 3-3
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
CIO Connectors, 6-23
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Index-3
Index
– continued
CLI, 3-25
Digital multimeter, required test equipment, 1-9
Clock Sync Module. See CSM
Directional coupler, required test equipment, 1-9
CLPA, 2-12
diversity receive path, definition, 3-109
expansion frame, 3-110
stand–alone frame, 3-109
Code domain power/noise floor
acceptance test, 4-21
analyzer display, 4-22
diversity RX path. See diversity receive path
Command Line Interface, 3-25
Documents, required, 1-12
command terminal, settings, I-2
Communication test set, rear panel, F-20 , F-21
Download
See also Devices
BTS, 3-36
BTS system software, 3-4
Communications test set. See Test equipment
Download BLO Procedure, 3-121
communications test set, TX acceptance tests, 4-4
download ROM and RAM code. See ROM code
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-55 , 3-75
Download/Enable MCCs, 3-43
Connector Functionality
Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-22
Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-22
Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-39
Control, TX output verification, 4-5
Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC, 4-26
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-16
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-11
E4406A, calibration, F-30
Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,
4-26
Enable CSMs. See CSM
Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 4-26
Equipment warm-up, 3-59 , 3-79
CSM
clock source, select, 3-41
enable, 3-42
LEDs, 3-45
system description, 3-44
establish MMI communication, 3-31
Common power supply verification, 2-11 , 2-13
Duplexer, optional test equipment, 1-10
Equipment Overview, 1-16
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-33
transceiver, 1-7
Ethernet LAN termination, 2-5
CSM clock source, select, 3-41
Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-28
CSM frequency verification, 3-47
External Test Equipment Removal, 5-3
CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-31
Failure report generation, 4-25
DC Power Pre–test, BTS Frame, 2-6
FER, acceptance test, 4-23
DC Power Problems, SCCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-26
Files, intermediate file, 4-25
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-30
Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, C-1
Devices, download. See Download
Digital Control Problems, 6-24
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-24
Index-4
files, calibration data, 3-111
Filtronics, low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or
equivalent, optional test equipment, 1-10
Fluke, model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit, test
equipment, 1-9
Folder Structure Overview, 3-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Index
– continued
forward link problem after passing reduced ATP, 6-17
Hardware Requirements, 1-6
Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1
Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB
Address, F-12
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-32
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional
test equipment, 1-11
High–impedance conductive wrist strap, required test
equipment, 1-10
Gain set point, D-1
Generating an ATP Report, 4-25
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address, F-17
Gigatronics 8542 power meter, calibration, F-33
HP 437
Pre–calibration, F-31
setting GPIB address, F-16
HP 83236A, F-22
HP 8921A PCS interface, Cables Connection for 10
MHz Signal and GPIB , F-20 , F-21
GLI Connector, 6-22
HP8921A, F-22
Test equipment connections , F-19
GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-22
HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-47
GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-33
Huber & Suhner, required test equipment, 1-9
GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-35
HyperTerminal, Creating named HyperTerminal
connection, 3-13
GPIB, F-19 , F-22 , F-24
cables, 1-9
set address, HP 437B, F-16
HyperTerminal , create named connection, 3-13
GPIB Address
Advantest R3267, F-8
Advantest R3465, F-14
Advantest R3562, F-9
Agilent (formerly HP) 8935, F-10
Agilent E4406A, F-5
Agilent E4432B, F-7
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter, F-17
Hewlett Packard HP8921a & HP83236A/B, F-12
Motorola CyberTest, F-15
I and Q values, B-1
In–Service Calibration, H-23
preliminary Agilent test equipment set–up, H-3 ,
H-6
test set–up diagrams
DRDC, Advantest, 3-71 , 3-91
TRDC, Advantest, 3-73 , 3-93
Initial HP8921A setup, F-35
GPIB Addresses, 3-96
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-2
GPIB Interface Box, RS232, F-18
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3
GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5
Initial power–up, BTS frame, 2-12
GPS Initialization/Verification
estimated position accuracy, 3-50
surveyed position accuracy, 3-50
Intermediate file, generate ATP file using, 4-25
GPS satellite system, 3-41
Graphical User Interface, 3-20
Internal Assemblies and FRUs, 1-18
IP Addresses, Agilent E7495A, 3-96
IS–97 specification, B-1
Group Line Interface. See GLI
GUI, 3-20
LAN, optional test equipment, 1-11
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Index-5
Index
– continued
LAN connectors, external, 2-1 , 2-2 , 2-3 , 2-5
LAN termination, 2-5
NECF, 3-4
LED, CSM, 3-45
New installations, 1-4
LED Status Combinations for all Modules except
GLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-30
No AMR control, 6-25
LIF, Load Information File, 3-9
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-26
LMF, F-19 , F-24
1X FER acceptance test, 4-4
1X upgrade preparation, home directory, 3-9
BTS connection, 3-18
platform requirements, 1-6
to BTS connection, 3-16 , 3-17
TX acceptance tests, 4-4
view CDF information, 3-5
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-27
LMF BTS displays, 3-19
LMF computer and software, 1-6
No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-25
No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-24
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-24
No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-25
No or missing span line traffic, 6-25
North American, cellular telephone system frequency
spectrum, CDMA allocation, E-4
LMF Removal, 5-4
Online Help, 3-32
Load Information File, 3-9
Local Maintenance Facility. See LMF
Logging Into a BTS, 3-25
optimization/ATP, test set–up
HP 8921A, 800 MHz, H-22
HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, H-22
MASTER LED, GLI, 6-34
Optional test equipment, 1-10
10 MHz rubidium standard, 1-11
2–way splitter, 1-11
CDMA subscriber mobile or portable
radiotelephone, 1-11
duplexer, 1-10
frequency counter, 1-10
LAN tester, 1-11
oscilloscope, 1-11
RF circular, 1-11
RF test cable, 1-11
spectrum analyzer, 1-10
MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-37
Oscilloscope, optional test equipment, 1-11
Logging Out, 3-30
Logical BTS, 1-16
Numbering, 1-17
LPA errors, 6-10
LPA Module LED, 6-39
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-39
MMI common connections, 3-32
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-32
GLI, 6-35
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,
3-18
Periodic optimization, 1-4
MMI Connectors, MCC–8, 6-38
Pilot Time Offset. See PN
MMI equipment setup, 3-32
Pilot time offset, acceptance test, 4-18
Module status indicators, 6-30
Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-147
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address, F-15
Multi Channel Card. See MCC
Multi–FER test Failure, 6-19
Index-6
Ping, 3-33
PN
offset programming information, B-1
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Index
– continued
offset usage, B-1
definition, 3-109
PN offset per sector, B-1
Reduced ATP, 4-1
PN Offset Usage , B-1
Report generation, ATP report, 4-25
power, removal, 2-15
DC power, 2-15
Required test equipment
communications system analyzer, 1-8
digital multimeter, 1-9
directional coupler, 1-9
GPIB cables, 1-9
high–impedance conductive wrist strap, 1-10
RF adapters, 1-10
RF attenuator, 1-9
RF load, 1-10
RS232 to GPIB interface, 1-7
timing reference cables, 1-9
Power Delta Calibration
Advantest, H-15
Agilent 8935, H-10
HP8921A, H-12
Power Input, 6-22
Power Meter, setting GPIB address, HP437B, F-16
Power meter, TX acceptance tests, 4-4
Required Test Equipment and Software, 1-5 , 1-6 ,
1-7
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-22
Pre–calibration, HP 437, F-31
RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-35
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3
RF
attenuator, 1-9
Circular – optional test equipment, 1-11
load for required test equipment, 1-10
required test equipment load, 1-10
test cable, 1-10
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-1
test data sheets, A-2
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment Removal, 5-3
Final Checks before leaving site, 5-5
LMF Removal, 5-4
Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans, 5-5
RF path, fault isolation, 6-13
RF path calibration. See Bay Level Offset calibration
Prerequisites, automated acceptance tests, 4-2
RFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-28
Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the
CBSC, 4-26 , 6-8 , 6-9
RFDS calibration
description, 3-134
procedure, 3-135
Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 4-26
RFDS Location, 1-26
Pseudorandom Noise. See PN
RFDS parameters, 3-126
checking, 3-127
setting, 3-127
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC–8/24E Card,
6-38
PWR/ALM LED
BBX, 6-36
CSM, 6-31
DC/DC Converter, 6-30
generic, 6-30
MCC–8/24E Card, 6-37
RAM code, described, 3-36
receive path
calibration, 3-109
component verification, 3-110
FEB 2005
RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-37
RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-134
Rho
TX waveform quality acceptance test, 4-16
waveform quality requirements, 4-16
ROM code
described, 3-36
downloading, G-1
procedure, G-2
RS232 GPIB Interface Box, F-18
RS232 to GPIB interface
modifications required for Automated Testing, 1-7
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Index-7
Index
– continued
required test equipment, 1-7
Spectrum analyzer, optional test equipment, 1-10
STATUS LED, GLI, 6-34
RX
acceptance tests, FER, 4-23
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-9
sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-12
Supported Test Sets, 3-55 , 3-75
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-32
RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-28
RX path. See receive path
System Connectivity Test, F-22
T1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-16
Tektronics model 2445 test equipment, 1-11
SC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, C-2
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-23
SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-6
Selecting Test Equipment, 3-96
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-132
Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-133
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-107
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-108
shut–down, BTS power. See power, removal
SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, D-1
terminal communication settings, I-2
Test data sheets
Alarm verification, A-10
general optimization checklist, A-4
GPS receiver operation, A-5
initial power tests, A-3
pre–power tests, A-3
preliminary operations, A-2
RX antenna VSWR, A-9
SCLPA convergence, A-6
site checklist, A-2
TX antenna VSWR, A-9
TX BLO, A-7
verification of test equipment used, A-1
signal generator, 1X FER acceptance test, 4-4
Test Equipment, Calibrating, 3-100
Site, equipage verification, 3-5
Test equipment
See also Optional test equipment; Required test
equipment
set up, TX output verification/control, 4-5
system analyzer, 1-8
TX acceptance tests, 4-4
verification data sheets, A-1
Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2
Site documents, 1-12
Site equipage, CDF/NECF, 3-4
Site expansion, 1-4
Software Release caveats, 4-26
Test equipment connections , preliminary Agilent
E4406A/E4432B set–up, F-28
Span I/O board
E1 span isolation, illustration, 3-16
T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-16
Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay Level
Offset, F-40
Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-56 , 3-76
Span line
T1/E1 verification equipment, 1-11
troubleshooting, 6-41
Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-114
Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-43
Span Line connector , 6-22
Timing reference cables, required test equipment
Model SGLN1145A/4132A CSMs, 1-9
Model SGLN4132B CSMs, 1-9
Spectral purity, TX mask – primary and redundant
BBX, 4-11
transmit path
calibration, 3-109
component verification, 3-110
definition, 3-109
Spectral purity transmit mask, acceptance test, 4-14
Transmit TX path audit, 3-122
SPANS LED, 6-34
Index-8
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
Index
– continued
Transmit TX path calibration, 3-115
TX Audit Test, 3-123
Troubleshooting
DC Power Problems, 6-26
RF path fault isolation, 6-13
Set span configuration, 6-43
span problems, 6-41
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-27
TX level accuracy fault isolation, 6-16
TX calibration, 3-118
All Cal/Audit, 3-119
set–up, 3-64 , 3-84
Advantest R3267, 3-66 , 3-86 , H-21
Advantest R3465, 3-65 , 3-85
Agilent 8935, 3-64 , 3-84
Agilent E4406A, 3-66 , 3-86 , H-21
CyberTest, 3-64 , 3-84
HP 8921A, 3-65 , 3-85
troubleshooting
communications system analyzer communication,
6-6
Ethernet LAN, 6-3
GLI IP address, 6-4
LMF login failure, 6-2
power meter communication, 6-5
signal generator communication, 6-6
tx fine adjust, B-1
TX path. See transmit path
TX path calibration, 3-118
TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-3
TSU NAM, programming
description, 3-130
parameter ranges, 3-131
parameters, 3-130
procedure, 3-136
Updating Calibration Data Files
Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC, 4-26
Software Release caveats, 4-26
TX
acceptance tests
code domain power/noise floor, 4-20
equipment setup, 4-4
pilot time offset, 4-18
spectral purity mask, 4-13
spectrum analyzer display, 4-15
waveform quality (rho), 4-16
all inclusive TX ATP test, 4-6
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-9 , A-10
BLO test data sheets, A-7
level accuracy fault isolation, 6-16
output acceptance tests
code domain power noise, 4-11
pilot time offset, 4-11
waveform quality, 4-11
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-18
verification during calibration, 3-110
Verify
test equipment used, test data sheets, A-1
TX output, 4-5
Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-38
Waveform quality (Rho), acceptance test procedure,
4-16
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , E-2
XCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-22
TX and RX Signal Routing, SCCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-27
Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,
3-18
FEB 2005
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Index-9
*68P09262A58−C*
68P09262A58–C
Technical
Information
1X SC 4812T LITE BTS
OPTIMIZATION/ATP
Software Release R2.16.5.x
SC4812T LITE
CDMA2000 1X
1 of 1
PRELIMINARY
ENGLISH
FEB 2005
68P09262A58–C
1X SC 4812T LITE BTS OPTIMIZATION/ATP
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.5.X
SC4812T LITE
CDMA2000 1X
1 of 1
PRELIMINARY
FEB 2005
ENGLISH
68P09262A58–C
Technical Information Products and Services
STANDARD MANUAL PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS
68P09262A58–C
Filename:
Part Number: 68P09262A58–C
APC:
379
Title: 1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.5.x
Volume 1
of 1
Print Vendor: eDOC
Date FEB 2005
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS – FOR REFERENCE–DO NOT MODIFY
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
PAPER:
1st. LEVEL TABS: 2nd. LEVEL TABS:
Body: 70 lb.
Inside Cover: 65 lb. Cougar
Tabs: 110 lb. Index
Binder Cover: Standard TED
cover – 10 pt. Carolina
Single Sided
5 Cuts
Clear Mylar
Pantone 2706–C
Black Ink
Single Sided
7 Cuts
Clear Mylar
White
Black Ink
FINISHING:
3–Ring Binder
Slant–D
3–Hole Punched
(5/16–in. dia.)
Shrink Wrap Body
Black ink for body, inside cover, and binder cover.
TAB and SHEET SIZE/QUANTITY
7X9
8.5x11 277
1st Level Tabs 16
11x17
Sheets = (Total Pages) / 2
2nd Level Tabs 0
NON–STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Tape Bound
Corner Stitch
Other: Meet with manager to determine the deliverable.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
MANUAL TITLE
PART NUMBER
Preparatory Tasks
Optimization/Calibration
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09262A58–C
*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***
CUT 1 –
Acceptance Test
Procedures
For 8.5x11, use all tabs.
For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER 1
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACK
CUT 2 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER 2
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 3 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER 3
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 4 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER 4
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 5 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER 5
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
Prepare to leave the Site
Troubleshooting
MANUAL TITLE
PART NUMBER
Data Sheets
PN Offset / I & Q Offset
Regtr. Programming Info.
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09262A58–C
*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***
CUT 1 –
FRU Optimization /
ATP Test Matrix
For 8.5x11, use all tabs.
For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER 6
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACK
CUT 2 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX A
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 3 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX B
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 4 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX C
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 5 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX D
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
BBX Gain Set Point
vs. BTS Output
CDMA Operating Freq.
Programming Information
MANUAL TITLE
PART NUMBER
Test Equipment
Preparation
Downloading ROM Code
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09262A58–C
*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***
CUT 1 –
In–Service Calibration
For 8.5x11, use all tabs.
For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX E
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACK
CUT 2 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX F
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 3 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX G
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 4 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX H
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 5 –
IN FRONT OF APPENDIX I
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
Packet Backhaul
Configuration
Index
MANUAL TITLE
PART NUMBER
1X SC 4812T Lite BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09262A58–C
*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***
CUT 1 –
For 8.5x11, use all tabs.
For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER Index
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACK
CUT 2 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 3 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 4 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 5 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.5
Linearized : No
Page Count : 335
Page Mode : UseOutlines
Has XFA : No
XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About : uuid:4b2b5505-f711-4120-883c-b9116aacbd1c
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date : 2005:02:03 08:58:28Z
Modify Date : 2005:02:22 13:36:18-06:00
Metadata Date : 2005:02:22 13:36:18-06:00
Document ID : uuid:aa813fd1-46d1-44dd-a97d-af9634f3c81c
Format : application/pdf
Creator : Win32 user
Title : 68P09262A58-C
Author : Win32 user
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
